Series 16i/18i/20i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is - Model A Connection manual (Function) Page 377

Connection manual (Function)

Page of 1627

/ 1627

4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT

B--63003EN--1/02

358

The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZMI (bit 5 of No.

1006) for each axis by turning the feed axis and direction select signal to

“1” in the manual reference position return mode, and is returned to the

reference position.

Manual reference position return is performed by using a grid method.

The reference position is based on an electrical grid, using on one--rota-

tion signals received from the position detector.

When the option for a workpiece coordinate system is not used, Bit 0 of

parameter 1201 (ZPR) can be set to automatically determine the

coordinate system at manual reference position return. Parameter 1250

can be set to determine the workpiece coordinate system by assigning,

upon the completion of reference position return, the value set in a

parameter to a reference point on the tool holder or the tip position of the

reference tool.

NOTE

Automatic coordinate system setting is not performed if the

option for a workpiece coordinate system is used. In that

case, manual reference position return always establishes

a workpiece coordinate system based on the workpiece

origin offsets, specified with parameters No. 1220 to 1226.

The following signals relate with the manual reference position return:

Manual Reference Position Return

Mode selection MD1, MD2 , MD4

Selection of reference position return ZRN, MREF

Selectionofaxistobemoved

Selection of direction to be moved

1, --

1, +

2, --

2, +

3, --

3, ...

Selection of speed to be moved ROV1, ROV2

Deceleration signal for reference

position return

*DEC1, *DEC2, *DEC3, ...

Completion signal for reference

position return

ZP1, ZP2, ZP3, ...

Reference position establis hment

signal

ZRF1, ZRF2, ZRF3, ...

4.1

MANUAL

REFERENCE

POSITION RETURN

General

D Automatic setting of

coordinate system

Contents Summary of Series 16i/18i/20i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is - Model A Connection manual (Function)

Page 1GE Fanuc Automation Computer Numerical Control Products Series 16i / 18i / 160i / 180i - Model A Series 20i / 21i / 210i - Model A Series 160is / 180is / 210is - Model A Connection Manual (Function) B-63003EN-1/02 September 1999
Page 2GFL-001 Warnings, Cautions, and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use. In situ
Page 3B--63003EN--1/02 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, sup
Page 4B--63003EN--1/02 PREFACE PREFACE This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine tool builders to design their CNC machine tools. The following items are explained for each function. 1. General Describes feature of the function. Refer to Operator’s manual as requied. 2. Signals
Page 5PREFACE B--63003EN--1/02 Applicable models The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are : Model name Abbreviation FANUC Series 16i--TA 16i--TA Series 16i FANUC Series 16i--MA 16i--MA FANUC Series 160i--TA 160i--TA FANUC Series 160is--TA 160is--TA Series 160i FANUC Series 160i--MA 1
Page 6B--63003EN--1/02 PREFACE Signal description Relation of interface signals among the CNC, the PMC and the machine tool is shown below: [For one--path control] G000-- X000-- CNC PMC Machine F000-- Y000-- tool [For two--path control] CNC G000-- X000-- Path 1 F000-- Y000-- PMC Machine G1000-- tool Path
Page 7PREFACE B--63003EN--1/02 D Expression of signals One address accommodates eight signals. Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signals are covered with shade ( ) in the signal ad
Page 8B--63003EN--1/02 PREFACE D Notation of bit type and bit axis type parameters Data No. Data (#0 to #7 indicates bit position) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC D Notation of parameters other than bit type and bit axis type Data No. Data 1023 Servo axis number of a specific axis NOTE In an
Page 9PREFACE B--63003EN--1/02 Related Manuals The table below lists manuals related to MODEL A of Series 16i, Series 18i, Series 160i and Series 180i. In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*). Table 1 Related manuals Specification Manual name Number DESCRIPTIONS B--63002EN CONNECTION MANUA
Page 10B--63003EN--1/02 PREFACE The following table lists the manuals related to the FANUC Series 20i--A. This manual is indicated by an asterisk (*). Table 3 Manuals related to the Series 20i Specification Manual name number Descriptions B--63002EN Connection Manual (Hardware) B--63003EN Connection Manual
Page 11B--63003EN--1/02 Table of Contents Volume 1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s-- 1 PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p--1 1. A
Page 12TABLE OF CONTENTS B--63003EN--1/02 1.9.3 Composite Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 1.9.3.1 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 13B--63003EN--1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 2.2 CN
Page 14TABLE OF CONTENTS B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 5.1 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 5.
Page 15B--63003EN--1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 7.1.5 F1-digit Feed (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Page 16TABLE OF CONTENTS B--63003EN--1/02 Volume 2 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 9.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 9.2 SPINDLE S
Page 17B--63003EN--1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 10.4 CUTTER COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922 10.4.1 Cutter Compensation B, C (M Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 18TABLE OF CONTENTS B--63003EN--1/02 12.1.18 External Operator Message Logging and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071 12.1.19 Erase Screen Display/Automatic Erase Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073 12.1.20 Touch Pad
Page 19B--63003EN--1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295 A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296 A.1
Page 20B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1 AXIS CONTROL 1
Page 211. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.1 CONTROLLED AXES General Series 16i, Series 160i Item M series T series No. of basic 1--path 3 axes 2 axes controlled axes 2--path 3 axes per path 2 axes per path Controlled axes 1--path Max. 8 axes Max. 8 axes expansion (Including the Cs axis) (Including the Cs a
Page 22B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Series 20i Item F series M series Number of One Three axes Two axes basic controlled path axes Total number of One Up to four axes Up to two axes controlled axes path including extensions Number of One Three axes Two axes basic path simultaneously controlled axes Tot
Page 231. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 015 TOO MANY AXES COM- The number of the commanded axes MANDED exceeded that of simultaneously con- (M series) trolled axes. Correct the program. TOO MANY AXES An attempt was made to move the ma- COMMANDED chine along the
Page 24B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS 1.2.1 Name of Axes General Each axis that is controlled by the CNC (including those controlled by the PMC) must be named. Select and set names from among X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, and W (with parameter 1020). The names of the basic axes, however,
Page 251. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE With 2--path control, when information (such as the current position) about each axis is displayed on the screen, an axis name may be followed by a subscript to indicate a path number (e.g.,X1 and X2). This is an axis name to help the user to easily underst
Page 26B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.2 Increment System General The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input ) and least command increment (for output). The least input increment is the least increment for programming the travel distance. The least command increment is the l
Page 271. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE Diameter programming is used only for T series. Whether diameter programming or radius programming is used is selected by parameter DIAx (No. 1006#3) on each axis. Also, parameter IPR (No. 1004#7) can make the least input increment of IS--B and IS--C ten times t
Page 28B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE IS--A cannot be used at present. IPR Whether the least input increment for each axis is set to a value 10 times as large as the least command increment is specified, in increment systems of IS--B and IS--C, mm input. 0 : The least input increment is not set to a
Page 291. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.2.3 Increment System 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.2.3 Increment System (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.2.3 Increment System (For Machining Center) (
Page 30B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit axis ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis. ROSx ROTx Meaning 0 0 Linear axis (1) Inch/metr
Page 311. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1) RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction 0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter. 1 : Specified by the sign of command
Page 32B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Note NOTE Rotary axis roll--over function cannot be used together with the indexing function of the index table. Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.2 Rotary Axis Roll--over 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.19.2 Rot
Page 331. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.2.4 Controlled Axes Detach General These signals release the specified control axes from control. When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table), these signals are selected according to whether the attachments are mounted. The signals can also be use
Page 34B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Controlled axis detach status signals MDTCH1 -- MDTCH8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals notify the PMC that the corresponding axes have been released from control. These signals are provided for each control axis; the affixed number of t
Page 351. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 MCCx When an axis is released from control, control for the MCC signal for the corresponding servo amplifier is 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled NOTE If the servo motor for an axis is connected to a 2--axis or other multiaxis amplifier, releasing the axis from control causes
Page 36B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.5 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis General The movement state of each axis can be output to the PMC. Signal Axis moving signals MV1 -- MV8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate that a control axis is moving. The signals a
Page 371. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Axis moving direction signals MVD1 -- MVD8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate the movement direction of control axis. They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the signal name corresponds to the control axis numbe
Page 38B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Caution CAUTION Axis moving signals and axis moving direction signals are output in both automatic and manual operations. 1.2.6 Mirror Image General Mirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or by parameters (setting input is acceptable). All moveme
Page 391. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 MI 1 1 ..... Applies mirror image to the 1st axis. 2 ..... Applies mirror image to the 2nd axis. 3 ..... Applies mirror image to the 3rd axis. : : : : The mirror image signal can be turned to “1” in the following cases: a) During offset cancel; b) When the CNC is in
Page 40B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0012 MIRx Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit axis MIRx Mirror image for each axis 0 : Mirror image is off. 1 : Mirror image is on. Warning WARNING 1 When programmable mirror image and ordinary mirror image are specified at
Page 411. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.2.7 Follow--up General When position control is disabled for the controlled axes (when the servo is off, during emergency stop, or during a servo alarm), if the machine is moved, a positional error occurs. Follow--up is a function for changing the current position
Page 42B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1819 FUPx [Data type] Bit axis FUPx To perform follow--up when the servo is off is set for each axis. 0 : The follow--up signal, *FLWU, determines whether follow--up is performed or not. When *FLWU is 0, follow--up is performed. When
Page 431. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.2.8 Servo Off (Mechanical Handle) General Place the controlled axes in the servo off state; that is, they stop the current to the servo motor, which disables position control. However, the position detection feature functions continuously, so the current position i
Page 44B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Caution CAUTION 1 In general, interlock is applied to an axis while the servo off signal for that axis is 1. 2 When one of these signals turns to “1”, the servo motor is turned off. The mechanical clamp is done by using the auxiliary function. Set the timing for the
Page 451. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.2.9 Position Switch General Position switch signals can be output to the PMC while the machine coordinates along a controlled axes are within a specified ranges. Signal Position switch signal PSW01 -- PSW10 [Classification] Output signal [Functio
Page 46B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter D Setting the correspondence between the position switch signals and the controlled axes 6910 Axis corresponding to the first position switch 6911 Axis corresponding to the second position switch 6912 Axis corresponding to the third position switch 6913 Axi
Page 471. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Setting the machine coordinate ranges for which the position switch signals are output D Maximum operation range 6930 Maximum operation range of the first position switch 6931 Maximum operation range of the second position switch 6932 Maximum operation range of the
Page 48B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL D Minimum operation range 6950 Minimum operation range of the first position switch 6951 Minimum operation range of the second position switch 6952 Minimum operation range of the third position switch 6953 Minimum operation range of the fourth position switch 6954 Mi
Page 491. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION 1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation General If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can be compensated in detection unit per axis. Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation position at the int
Page 50B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL · Interval of the pitch error compensation positions (for each axis): Parameter 3624 Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error compensation data 1 Set the following parameters: Number of the pitch error compensation position at the reference position (for
Page 511. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Explanations D Specifying the To assign the compensation positions for each axis, specify the positive compensation position direction or the negative direction in reference to the compensation position No. of the reference position. If the machine stroke exceeds the
Page 52B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Therefore, set the parameters as follows: Parameter Setting value 3620 : Compensation number for the reference position 40 3621 : Smallest compensation position number 33 3622 : Largest compensation position number 56 3623 : Compensation magnification 1 3624 : Interv
Page 531. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D For rotary axis Amount of movement per rotation: 360 Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45 No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 60 If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation position in the negative di
Page 54B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL The following is an example of compensation amounts. No 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Compensation value +1 --2 +1 +3 --1 --1 --3 +2 +1 Pitch error compensation value (absolute value) +4 +3 Reference position 68 +2 (60) +1 68 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 (6
Page 551. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 3622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive posi- tion for each axis NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range
Page 56B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with equally spaced. Set the space between two adjacent positions for each axis. The minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions is limited and obtained from the foll
Page 571. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.8.6.3 Inputting pitch error compensa- 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) tion data (B--63014EN) III.8.6.4 Outputting pitch error compensa- tion data III.11.5.2 Displaying and setting pitch error compensation data OPER
Page 58B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.3.2 Backlash Compensation General D Backlash compensation Function for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set a compensation value in parameter No. 1851, in detection units from 0 to 9999 pulses for each axis. D Backlash compensation More precise machini
Page 591. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1800 RBK [Data type] Bit RBK Backlash compensation applied separately for cutting feed and rapid traverse 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed 1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection u
Page 60B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.3.3 Straightness Compensation General For a machine tool with a long stroke, deviations in straightness between axes may deteriorate machining accuracy. For this reason, when an axis moves, other axes are compensated in detection units to improve straightness. This
Page 611. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 5721 Axis number of compensation axis 1 for moving axis 1 5722 Axis number of compensation axis 2 for moving axis 2 5723 Axis number of compensation axis 3 for moving axis 3 [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Axis number (When 0, compensation is not performed.) [Valid d
Page 62B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 5761 Compensation corresponding to compensation position number a of moving axis 1 5762 Compensation corresponding to compensation position number b of moving axis 1 5763 Compensation corresponding to compensation position number c of moving axis 1 5764 Compensation
Page 631. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 The straightness compensation function can be used after a moving axis and its compensation axis have returned to the reference position. 2 After setting parameters for straightness compensation, be sure to turn off the NC power. 3 Set parameters for stra
Page 64B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.4 The servo interface of the Series 16 features the following: Digitally controlled AC servo motor SETTINGS RELATED Motor feedback with serial pulse coders TO SERVO-- (1) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses/rev CONTROLLED AXES (2) Absolute pu
Page 651. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1800 CVR [Data type] Bit CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before position control ready signal PRDY comes ON 0 : A servo alarm is generated. 1 : A servo alarm is not generated. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1815 APCx A
Page 66B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL [Data type] Bit axis DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiplier Set value Detection multiplier DM3x DM2x DM1x 0 0 0 1/2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 3/2 0 1 1 2 1 0 0 5/2 1 0 1 3 1 1 0 7/2 1 1 1 4 NOTE When the flexible feed gear is used, do not use these parameters. Set the nume
Page 671. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 (2) When command multiplier is 1 to 48 Set value = 2 × command multiplier Valid data range: 2 to 96 NOTE When command multiplier is 1 to 48, the set value must be determined so that an integer can be set for command multiplier. 1821 Reference counter size for each ax
Page 68B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis. If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit during movement, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency stop). Generally, set the positionin
Page 691. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.4.2 Absolute Position Detection General Even when the power to the CNC is turned off, a battery--powered pulse coder stores the current position. No reference position return is required when the power to the CNC is turned on next. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Page 70B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.4.3 FSSB Setting Overview Connecting the CNC control section to servo amplifiers via a high--speed serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which uses only one fiber optics cable, can significantly reduce the amount of cabling in machine tool electrical sectio
Page 711. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Slave In an FSSB--based system, a fiber optics cable is used to connect the CNC to servo amplifiers and pulse modules. These amplifiers and pulse modules are called slaves. The two--axis amplifier consists of two slaves, and the three--axis amplifier consists of thre
Page 72B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL By manual setting 1, some of the following functions and values cannot be used, as described below. They should be used in automatic setting or manual setting 2. D No pulse module can be used; hence, no separate position detectors can be used. D No number can be skip
Page 731. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Manual setting 2 If the following parameter is set, manual setting 2 can be used for each parameter axis setting. Bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 = 1 To perform manual setting 2, set parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919, 1936, and 1937. Refer to the Parameter Manual f
Page 74B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL FSSB display and setting procedure D Display The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB--based amplifier and axis information. This information can also be specified by the operator. 1. Press the SYSTEM function key. 2. To display [FSSB], press the next menu page key seve
Page 751. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D AMP . . . . amplifier type The amplifier type display consists of the letter A, which stands for “amplifier”, a number that indicates the placing of the amplifier, as counted from that nearest to the CNC, and a letter such as L (first axis) or M (second axis) indic
Page 76B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL D AXIS . . . . controlled axis number This item is the placing of the NC controlled axis. D NAME . . . controlled axis name D AMP . . . . type of the amplifier connected to each axis D M1 . . . . . . connector number for pulse module 1 This item is the number of the
Page 771. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE O1000 N00001 AXIS NAME EDITION TEST MEINTE-NO. 1 X 01A 970123 01 2 Y 01A 970123 01 3 Z 01A 970123 01 4 A 02B 970123 01 5 B 02B 970123 01 6 C 02B 970123 01 >_ MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56 [ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][ ] The amplifier maintenance scr
Page 78B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL When the power is switched on, values are read from the parameters and displayed on the screen. NOTE 1 For the parameters to be specified on the FSSB setting screen, do not attempt to enter values on the parameter screen using the MDI or a G10 command. Use only the F
Page 791. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 (2) Axis setting screen AXIS SETTING O1000 N00001 AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1-DSP CS TNDM 1 X A1-L 0 0 0 0 1 2 Y A1-M 1 0 1 0 0 3 Z A2-L 0 0 0 1 0 4 A A3-L 0 0 0 0 2 5 B A3-M 0 0 0 0 0 6 C A4-L 0 0 0 0 0 >_ MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56 [ SETING ][ ][ CANCEL ][ ][ INPUT ] On t
Page 80B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL D A duplicate value is specified for M1. D A duplicate value is specified for M2. D A duplicate value is specified for CS. D A duplicate value is specified for TNDM. D An invalid master/slave axis pair is specified for TNDM. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1902 ASE
Page 811. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D For two--axis amplifiers, do not use fast type interfaces for both axes simultaneously. Slow types can be used simultaneously for both axes. D For three--axis amplifiers, the same rules as those for two--axis amplifiers apply to the first and second axes, while the
Page 82B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1910 Address conversion table value for slave 1 (ATR) 1911 Address conversion table value for slave 2 (ATR) 1912 Address conversion table value for slave 3 (ATR) 1913 Address conversion table value for slave 4 (ATR) 1914 Address conversion table value for slave 5 (AT
Page 831. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 f Example of axis configuration and parameter setting CNC Slave ATR Controlled Program Servo axis number No.1910 Axis axis axis name number to 1919 number (No. 1020) (No. 1023) Single--axis 1 0 1 X 1 amplifier X 2 Y 3 2 1 A Two--axis amplifier 3 Z 4 3 2 Y 4 A 2 Two--
Page 84B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL f Example of axis configuration and parameter setting when the simple electronic gearbox (EGB) function is used (EGB workpiece axis = A--axis; EGB axis = B--axis (parameter No. 7771 = 5)) CNC Slave ATR number No.1910 Axis Controlled Program Servo axis axis axis name
Page 851. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1931 Connector number for first pulse module (FSSB setting screen only) 1932 Connector number for second pulse module (FSSB setting screen only) [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to the number of connectors in each pulse module To use a pulse module, the use
Page 86B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Example) Connector Connector Controlled number for number for No.1905 first pulse second pulse No.1936 No.1937 axis (#7, #6) module module X 1 Not used 0 0 0,1 Y Not used 2 0 1 1,0 Z Not used 1 0 0 1,0 A Not used Not used 0 0 0,0 B 2 Not used 1 0 0,1 C Not used 3 0 2
Page 871. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Number Message Description 466 n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP The maximum current rating for the am- COMBINATION plifier does not match that for the motor. 467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SET- The servo function for the following has TING OF AXIS not been enabled when an axis occu- pying a
Page 88B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.5 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS 1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System General Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point proper to the machine system. A coordinate system in which the reference position becomes the parameter-preset
Page 891. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) SYSTEM (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) SYSTEM Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE (For
Page 90B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Selecting a workpiece The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described coordinate system below. (1) Selecting a workpiece coordinate system set by G92 (G50) or automatic workpiece coordinate system setting Once a workpiece coordinate system is s
Page 911. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Workpiece coordinate When the coordinate system actually set by the G92 (G50) command or system shift (T series) the automatic coordinate system setting deviates from the programmed workpiece coordinate, the set coordinate system can be shifted. Set the desired shift
Page 92B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL ZPI Coordinates at the reference position when a coordinate system is set automatically 0 : Value set in parameter No. 1250 is used. 1 : For input in mm, the value set in parameter 1250 is used, or for input in inches, the value set in parameter No. 1251 is used. AWK
Page 931. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1220 External workpiece zero point offset value [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Input increment IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Linear axis (input in mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Page 94B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54) Workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55) Workpiece zero point offset Origin of machine coordinate system 1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed [Data type] Two--word ax
Page 951. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7.2 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7.2 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7.2 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM (For M
Page 96B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.5.3 Rotary Axis Roll Over General The roll--over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from overflowing. The roll--over function is enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter 1008 to 1. For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified
Page 971. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1008 RRLx RABx ROAx NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit axis ROAx The roll--over function of a rotation axis is 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid NOTE ROAx specifies the
Page 98B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Note NOTE This function cannot be used together with the indexing function of the index table (M series). Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.2 ROTARY AXIS ROLL--OVER 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.19.2 ROTARY AXI
Page 991. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.6 SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL General A movement along an axis can be executed simply by executing a move command specified for that axis or by synchronizing the movement with another axis. Either of these two types can be selected by means of a signal sent from the
Page 100B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL WARNING 1 Before using the synchronization error check function, set identical values for the reference positions of the master and slave axes. 2 To clear the alarm, first increase the maximum synchronization error set in parameter 8314, then press the reset key. Nex
Page 1011. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 To use the synchronization compensation function, set the SOF bit, bit 7 of parameter 8301 (if only one master/slave axis pair is in sync) or SOFx bit, bit 7 of parameter 8303 (if more than one master/slave axis pair is in sync), to 1. 2 The synchronization co
Page 102B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL D Torque difference alarm If the master and slave axes operate independently while simple detection (M series) synchronous control is applied, the machine may be damaged. To prevent this, the torque command difference between the axes is monitored. If the difference
Page 1031. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 4 Set parameter No. 2115 to 22160. 5 Connect a check board, and observe a signal at CH7 with the rotary switch on the check board set to 1. 6 Convert the observed value, using the formula 1 V = 410 (specified threshold value). Read the maximum value during ordinary o
Page 104B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Signals for selecting the manual feed axis for simple synchronous control SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] synchronous control is performed in jog, handle, or incremental feed mode. The signal is provided for each controlled
Page 1051. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter T series 8311 Axis number of master axis in synchronous control [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7 Select a master axis for simple synchronous control. Set a master axis number for the axis used as a slave axis. If the value of this parameter i
Page 106B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 8312 Enabling/disabling mirror image in synchronous control [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] --128 to +127 This parameter sets the mirror image function. When 100 or a greater value is set with this parameter, the mirror image function is applied to synchrono
Page 1071. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8302 ATS ATE NOTE The system power must be turned off then back on in order for this parameter setting to become effective. [Data type] Bit ATE Specify whether to enable the automatic setting of grid positioning under simple synchronous contro
Page 108B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 8311 Axis number of master axis in synchronous control [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7 Select a master axis and slave axis for simple synchronous control. Set a master axis number for the slave axis side. Example1: When using the first axis (X--axis)
Page 1091. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 8314 Allowable error in synchronization error check [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Metric machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 327
Page 110B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 8317 Torque difference alarm detection timer (one master/slave axis pair under synchro- nous control) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (if 0 is specified, the system assumes 512 ms.) This parameter specifies the time between the servo p
Page 1111. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 8327 Torque difference alarm detection timer (more than one master/slave axis pair under synchronous control) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 This parameter specifies the time between the servo preparation completed signal (SA [F0
Page 112B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Servo alarm Number Message Description 407 SERVO ALARM: The difference in position error be- EXCESS ERROR tween the master and slave axes ex- ceeded the value set with the parame- ter 8314. 410 SERVO ALARM: The most likely causes are: n AXIS EXCESS ERR 1 For the n ax
Page 1131. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Caution CAUTION 1 When a manual reference position return is executed, identical movements are performed along the master and slave axes until deceleration commences. Subsequently, grids are detected separately. 2 Pitch error compensation and backlash compensation ar
Page 114B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.7 TANDEM CONTROL General If a single motor cannot produce sufficient torque to move a large table, for example, this function allows two motors to be used. By means of this function, two motors can be used to perform movement along a single axis. Positioning is car
Page 1151. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 PC: Pulse coder Master Slave axis axis PC PC Power Power line line Servo Servo amplifier amplifier PWM PWM Rotor Rotor position position Current Current loop loop PRM. 2087 Speed FB PRM. 2087 Speed FB Preload (L) Preload (M) + + + + Re- Re- verse? verse? PRM. 2022 PR
Page 116B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Explanations D Axis configuration in To specify the axis configuration in tandem control, follow the procedure tandem control below: (1) Tandem control can be performed for up to four pairs of axes. (2) In terms of controlled axes, the pair of axes is handled as two
Page 1171. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Preload function By adding an offset to the torque controlled by the position (velocity) feedback device, the function can apply opposite torques to the master and slave axes so that equal and opposite movements are performed for both axes. This function can reduce
Page 118B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL D Connection of axis The DI/DO signals, generally connected to each axis, must be connected signals only to the master axis of two axes of tandem control. The signals need not be connected to the slave axis. The following signals, however, may have to be connected de
Page 1191. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 The classifications of the parameters are described below. Any parameter that is not listed in the tables for the three classifications should be processed as a parameter of type i) and, specify identical values for the master and slave axes. WARNING Note that, if di
Page 120B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameters that should be set to only the master Parameter No. Meaning of parameters axes 0012#0 Mirror image 0012#7 Servo control off 1004#7 Input unit 10 times 1005#4 External deceleration in plus direction 1005#5 External deceleration in minus direction 1005#7 Ser
Page 1211. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Parameters that should be set the same values Parameter No. Meaning of parameters to the master and slave 1005#0 Movement before reference position return axes 1005#1 Dogless reference position setting 1006#0 Rotary axis 1006#1 Machine coordinate of rotary axis is ro
Page 122B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 2087 Preload of each axis (Tcmd offset) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] (Preamplifier limit) /7282 [Valid data range] --1821 to 1821 An offset is added to a torque command to reduce backlash. Set a slightly large value than friction torque. As a reference set a
Page 1231. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.8 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (T SERIES) General This function enables synchronous control, in which an axis can be synchronized with another axis. An axis can be moved in synchronization with another axis. This is done by issuing a move command for one axis (synchronous m
Page 124B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Automatic setting of workpiece coordinate system D Explanation When synchronous control is started for a workpiece coordinate system, it is possible to specify the workpiece coordinate system automatically. When synchronous control for a workpiece coordinate system i
Page 1251. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 (2) Workpiece coordinate system for ordinary operation (Master axis workpiece coordinate value) = (parameter No. 1250 for the master axis) + (master axis machine coordinate value) D Others S If many slave axes are synchronized with one master axis, the master axis is
Page 126B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Synchronous control under way signals SYN1O to SYN8O [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate each axis is being subjected to synchronous control. [Operation] These signals become “1” under the following condition: S The corresponding a
Page 1271. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8162 PKUx SMRx [Data type] Bit axis SMRx Synchronous mirror--image control is: 0 : Not applied. (The master and slave axes move in the same direction.) 1 : Applied. (The master and slave axes move in opposite directions.) PKUx In the parking s
Page 128B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL SCDx The positive (+) directions of the master axis and slave axis in the coordinate system in synchronous control are: 0 : Identical. 1 : Opposite. 8180 Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under synchronous control [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range]
Page 1291. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Warning, Caution, and Note for synchronous control WARNING 1 When synchronous control is started or terminated, the target axes must be at a stop. 2 All axes subjected to synchronous control must have the same least command increment, detection unit, and diameter/rad
Page 130B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE 1 More than one axis can be placed in synchronous state at the same time. However, an axis cannot be synchronized with more than one axis simultaneously. 2 Synchronous control and simplified synchronous control cannot be specified simultaneously. Restrictions im
Page 1311. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 WARNING If a reference position return command is issued for a synchronous master axis during synchronous control, it is executed normally for the master axis, but the slave axis does not return to their reference position (the slave axis only moves in synchronizatio
Page 132B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Terminating Synchronous control is terminated not only when the corresponding synchronous control synchronization signal becomes off but also when one of the following conditions occurs. (1) Emergency stop (2) Reset (3) Servo alarm (4) Servo off (5) Overtravel (6) Al
Page 1331. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.9 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL (T SERIES (TWO--PATH CONTROL)) 1.9.1 The T series CNC has two independent control paths. For example, it can Overview be used to control two turrets of a multiple--turret lathe independently. The axes (such as X1--and Z1-
Page 134B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Turret 1 X1 Workpiece Z1 Z2 (synchronized with the Z1--axis) Machining is performed by a path 1 program. S Synchronization of an axis in one path with another axis in the same path (Example) Synchronization of the Z1--axis with the B1--axis Turret 1 X1 Tail stock Wor
Page 1351. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 (2) Composite control S Interchanging move commands for an axis in one path with those for an axis in the other path. (Example) Interchanging commands between the X1-- and X2--axes Control both X2-- and Z1--axes by commands in a path 1 program Control both X1-- and
Page 136B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL (3) Superimposed control S Superimposing move commands for an axis in one path on an axis in the other path (Example) Superimposing the movement of the Z1--axis on the Z2--axis Machining is performed by a Turret 1 path 1 program. X1 Workpiece 1 Z1 X2 Turret 2 Z2 Mach
Page 1371. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.9.2.1 Parameter No. 8180 specifies which axis is to be synchronized with which Setting axis. (Example) To synchronize the Z1--axis with the Z2--axis: Parameter No. 8180z of path 1 = 2 To synchronize the Y2--axis with the X1--axis: Parameter No. 8180y of path 2 = 1
Page 138B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Z1 Turret 1 X1 X2 Turret 2 Z2 (Example 3) Synchronizing the B1--axis (tail stock axis) with the Z1--axis Turret 1 X1 Tail stock Workpiece 1 B1 Z1 (synchronized with the Z1--axis) (2) Moving an axis in one path using move commands for an axis in the other path (The ma
Page 1391. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Master axis parking Turret 1 X1 The X2-- and Z1--axes are moved by commands in a path 2 program (by synchronizing the Z1--axis with the Z2--axis). At this point, the Z2--axis is kept in a parking state. The coordi- nates of both Z1-- and Z2--axes are up- dated. Z1
Page 140B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.9.2.5 If a reference position return command is issued for a synchronous master Reference position axis during synchronous control, it is executed normally for the master axis, but the slave axis does not return to its reference position (the slave return and its c
Page 1411. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.9.2.7 If synchronous control is terminated during automatic operation, do not Move command after issue a move command or coordinate system setting for the synchronous slave axis in the current block and one or two (during tool--nose radius switching between compens
Page 142B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL (2) To resume the ordinary workpiece coordinate system automatically when terminating synchronous control Set parameter SPSx (parameter No. 8163) to “1”. Set parameter No. 1250 with the master axis coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system when the master axis i
Page 1431. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 If more than one slave axis is synchronized with one master axis, the master axis is set with the workpiece coordinate system that corresponds to the current position of the first slave axis that is synchronized with the master axis. 2 The tool offset is
Page 144B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.9.3.4 Suppose that a machine has the X1-- and Z1--axes belonging to path 1 and Examples of applications the X2-- and Z2--axes belonging to path 2 and that a workpiece moves along the Z1-- and Z2--axes as directed by move commands. The following examples interchange
Page 1451. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.9.3.5 The composite control function does not switch the spindle speed Spindle control command or the feed per rotation command based on feedback pulses from the position coder. Therefore, the spindle speed command and feedback pulses should be switched using the f
Page 146B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.9.4 The superimposed control function adds the amount of movement of an Superimposed Control axis (superimposed control master axis) in one path to an axis (superimposed control slave axis) on the other path for which ordinary move commands are being executed. This
Page 1471. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.9.4.4 Suppose that a workpiece on the spindle (Z1--axis) that moves along the Examples of applications axis is to be cut with a tool in path 1 and a tool in path 2 simultaneously. This example superimposes the amount of movement of the Z1--axis on that of the Z2--a
Page 148B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL These special parameters are used for both master and slave axes during superimposed control. Appropriate values should be specified with the resulting feedrate taken into account. When superimposed control begins or ends during automatic operation, it is impossible
Page 1491. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 If the corresponding axis is under synchronous control, it enters a parking state immediately regardless of whether the axis is moving. If a parking signal is set to “1” without specifying synchronous control, it is ignored. Composite control axis selection signal MI
Page 150B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL These signals become “0” under the following condition: S The corresponding axis is not under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control. CAUTION Whether each axis is under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control does not always match whether the corresp
Page 1511. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 XSI When MXC = 1, the machine coordinates along the X--axis for the other path subject to mixed control are fetched: 0 : With the sign as is 1 : With the sign inverted ZSI When MXC = 1, machine coordinates along the Z--axis for the other path subject to mixed control
Page 152B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL SERx The synchronization deviation is: 0 : Not detected. 1 : Detected. NOTE When both master and slave axes move in synchronization, the positioning deviations of the corresponding axes are compared with each other. If the difference is larger than or equal to the va
Page 1531. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 MCDx The axes to be replaced with each other under composite control have the coordinate systems placed: 0 : In the same direction. Simple composite control is applied. (The axes of paths 1 and 2 move in the same direction.) 1 : In opposite directions. Mirror--image
Page 154B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8163 SCDx SCMx SPSx SPMx MDXx NOTE Set the parameters SPMx, SPSx, SCMx, and SCDx for the master axis. These settings are referenced during automatic workpiece coordinate setting for the master axis at the start of synchronous control. [Data ty
Page 1551. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Parameters SPMx, SPSx, SCMx, and SCDx must be specified for the master axis. These parameter settings are referenced in automatic setting of the workpiece coordinates for the master axis when synchronization control begins. 8180 Master axis with which an axis is sync
Page 156B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 8182 Display of the synchronization error of an axis (synchronous or composite control) [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Unit of detection [Valid data range] 0 or more When the synchronization deviation is detected (SERx of Bit #1 parameter No. 8162 is set t
Page 1571. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 8184 Coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the coordinate system of another axis under composite control [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.0
Page 158B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL X1 = (Value specified for the X--axis of path 1) (Machine coordinates of X2) Plus when parameter No. 8162#6 MCDx of path 1 is set to 0 Minus when parameter No. 8162#6 MCDx of path 1 is set to 1 X2 =(Value specified for the X--axis of path 2)(Machine coordinates of
Page 1591. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 8190 Rapid traverse rate of an axis under superimposed control [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1
Page 160B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 8194 Maximum cutting feedrate of an axis under superimposed control [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000 Inch machine 0
Page 1611. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Number Message Description 229 Synchronization cannot be This alarm occurs under either of the maintained. following conditions. (1) Synchronous or composite control can- not be maintained because of system overload. (2) Synchronous or composite control can- not be m
Page 162B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.9.8.1 Items common to synchronous, composite, and WARNING superimposed control 1 When synchronous, composite, or superimposed control begins or ends, the target axes must be at a stop. 2 All axes subjected to synchronous, composite, or superimposed control must hav
Page 1631. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 More than one axis can be subjected to synchronous, composite, or superimposed control. On the other hand, an axis cannot be synchronized with more than one axis simultaneously. Moreover, an axis under composite control cannot be synchronized with another axis
Page 164B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.9.8.3 Restrictions imposed during synchronous, composite, and superimposed control Function During synchronous During composite During superimposed control control control Acceleration/deceleration The acceleration/decelera- The acceleration/decelera- The move puls
Page 1651. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Function During synchronous During composite During superimposed control control control Interlock The signals for the synchro- Signals originally specified Signals for the master axis nous master axis are effec- for one path are effective for are effective as superi
Page 166B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.9.8.4 The following list summarizes how positional information such as Reading the coordinates custom macro system variables and current coordinates from the PMC window are read during synchronous, composite, or superimposed during synchronous, control. composite,
Page 1671. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.9.8.6 Status output signals for an axis under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control Status output signal During synchronous During composite During superimposed control control control Axis moving signal MVn S The master axis moving S The moving signal fo
Page 168B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.9.9 Examples of Applications 1.9.9.1 Independent control and (1) Machine configuration synchronous control of (a) Independent control the Z1-- and Z2-- axes Path 1 (X1-- and Z1--axes) Turret 1 performs machining sepa- X1 rately from path 2 (X2-- and Z1 Z2 Z2--axes)
Page 1691. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 S To apply mirror--image synchronization (because initially the positive direction of one axis is opposite to that of the other axis), set SMRz (bit 0 of parameter No. 8162) of path 2 to “1”. S To detect out--of--synchronization (because both axes should move by the
Page 170B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL In this example, assume that M61 clamps the workpiece and sets signal G1138#1 SYNC2 to “1” and that M62 resets signal G1138#1 SYNC2 to “0” and unclamps the workpiece. NOTE It is necessary to make the speed of spindle S1 equal that of spindle S2. For example, issue sp
Page 1711. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1. The path 2 program directs the X2-- and Z2--axes, synchronizes the X1--axis with the X2--axis, and causes the X2--axis to park. The path 1 program issues no move command. 2. Composite control is performed in which move commands are switched between the X1--axis in
Page 172B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL N2050 T0212 ; Specifies an offset for turret 1. N2060 S1000 M4 ; Reverses the spindle. N2070 G0 X30. Z55. ; Performs machining N2080 G1 F0. 2 W- 15. ; using the X1-- and Z2--axes. N2090 ······· N2100 M56 ; Terminates synchronization and parking. N1110 M201 ; N2110 M2
Page 1731. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Reference position 150.0mm of turret 1 Z2 X2 (2) Signal operation S Set signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “1” when composite control begins for the X2-- and X1--axes. S Reset signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “0” when composite control ends. S Also reset G0128#0 MIX1 to “0” when an emerge
Page 174B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL N2110 M56 ; Terminates composite control (the position of turret 1 is set up as workpiece coordinates in path 1.) N1120 M201; N2120 M201 ; Waits for composite control to be terminated. N1130 ; N2130 ; Dummy block (performing no move command) N1140 ········ N2140 ····
Page 1751. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.9.9.3 Independent control and interpolation between the X1-- and Z2-- axes and between the X2-- and (1) Machine configuration Z1--axes (a) Independent control Z2 Spindle S2 X2 Workpiece 2 and turret 2 Workpiece 1 and turret 1 Turret 2 are controlled by a path are c
Page 176B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL (b) Interpolation between the X1-- and Z2--axes and between the X2-- and Z1--axes Z2 Workpiece 2 and turret 1 are controlled by a path 2 program. Spindle S2 X1 Turret 1 Turret 2 X2 Spindle S1 Workpiece 1 and turret 2 are controlled by a path 1 program. Z1 (2) Paramet
Page 1771. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Z2 180.0mm Reference position for turret 1 Reference position for turret 2 X2 X1 120.0mm 200.0mm Z1 (3) Signal operation S Set signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “1” when composite control begins for the X2-- and X1--axes. S Reset signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “0” when composite contro
Page 178B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL N1050 T0313 N2050 T0212 ; Selects a tool for composite control and sets the offset. N1060 G50 W120. ; N2060 G50 W120. ; Shifts the Z--axis workpiece coordinate system. N1070 S1000 M4 ; N2070 S1500 M4 ; Performs N1080 G0 X20. Z15. ; N2080 G0 X15. Z30.; machining under
Page 1791. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.9.9.4 Independent control and (1) Machine configuration superimposed control for the Z1-- and Z2-- axes (a) Independent control Path 1 (X1-- and Z1--axes) performs machining sepa- Turret 1 rately from path 2 (X2-- and Z1 X1 Z2--axes). Spindle S1 Spindle S2 X2 Turre
Page 180B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL S Set the feedrate along each Z--axis for superimposed control in parameter Nos. 8190z, 8191z, and 8193 of both paths. Each value to be set must be about half the one for independent control. S Set the rapid traverse time constant for each Z--axis under superimposed
Page 1811. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 N1120 ······· N2120 ········ Machining under control independent of the other path WARNING When using constant surface speed control, be careful about which path has the spindle command that is effective for spindle S1. NOTE The speed of spindle S1 (feedback pulses f
Page 182B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.9.10 1.Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control cannot be started, Troubleshooting but no alarm is issued. (1) The synchronous or composite control option has not been specified. The synchronous and composite control must be specified. (2) The G0128, G0138,
Page 1831. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 2. The P/S225 alarm occurs when a signal for synchronous, composite, or superimposed control arises. (1) An attempt was made to perform synchronous, composite, or superimposed control for an axis that was already under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control.
Page 184B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL (2) A move command was issued to an axis under composite control for which parameter MUMx (bit 7 of parameter No. 8162) is “1”. No move command (either automatic or manual) can be issued to an axis under composite control for which parameter MUMx (bit 7 of parameter
Page 1851. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 8. An axis does not move to a specified position after synchronous or composite control switching. (1) A move command was issued within two blocks after synchronous or composite control. The coordinate system in the CNC must be re--set at synchronous or composite con
Page 186B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.10 B--AXIS CONTROL (T SERIES) General This function sets an axis (B--axis) independent of the basic controlled axes X1, Z1, X2, and Z2 and allows drilling, boring, or other machining along the B--axis, in parallel with the operations for the basic controlled axes.
Page 1871. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Command used to start the operation To start an operation, the miscellaneous functions (M**) specified in parameters 8251 to 8253 are used. Parameter 8251: M code used to start operation of the first program Parameter 8252: M code used to start operation of the sec
Page 188B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Explanations D Specifying two--path One of the following three two--path control modes can be selected: control mode 1 B--axis control is executed for either tool post 1 or 2. 2 B--axis control is executed separately for tool posts 1 and 2. 3 Identical B--axis contro
Page 1891. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 G80 to G86 (canned drilling cycle) Of the canned drilling cycles supported by the CNC for machining centers, those cycles equivalent to G80 to G86 can be executed. Data can be specified in the same way as for the CNC for machining centers, except for the following po
Page 190B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE 1 Range of commands of M, S, and T codes 2 An M, S, or T code must not be specified in a block containing another move command. The M, S, and T codes must not be specified in an identical block. 3 Usually, normal NC operation and B--axis operation are independen
Page 1911. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Example) : G01 X10. F1000 ; ¡ G101 (G102, G103) ; © B10. ; ¢ G01 B--10. F500 ; £ G100 ; ¤ X--10. ; ¥ : Irrespective of the modal information for normal operation (G01 specified in block), block ¢ specifies G00 if the MDG bit (bit 1 of parameter 8241) is set to 0, or
Page 192B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL D Specifying absolute or The amount of travel along the B--axis can be specified in either absolute incremental mode or incremental mode. In absolute mode, the end point of travel along the B--axis is programmed. In incremental mode, the amount of travel along the B-
Page 1931. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Example) : G101 ; G00 B10. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One block G04 P1500 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One block G81 B20. R50. F600 ; . . . . . . . . Three blocks G28 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One block M15 ; . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 194B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Examples D Absolute or incremental mode Absolute or incremental mode 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 (1) (200) (2) (350) (450) Dwell (200) (3) (350) (550) Dwell (200) (100) ( Rapid traverse, Cutting feed, Dwell (***) Absolute value ) Incremental mode Absolute mode G101 (G1
Page 1951. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Tool offset Example) When parameter 8257 is set to 50 Auxiliary function used to cancel the offset: T50 Auxiliary functions used to adjust a tool offset: T51 to T59 ---10 0 10 20 30 40 50 (350) (Absolute mode) (1) (10) (20) (2) (3) (30) (4) (25) (5) (5) (6) (0) (In
Page 196B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8240 MST ABS SOV TEM REF [Data type] Bit REF Reference position return operation by G28: 0 : Always uses deceleration dogs in the same way as a manual reference position return operation. 1 : Uses deceleration dogs when a reference p
Page 1971. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8242 COF [Data type] Bit COF For tool post 1 and tool post 2 (under two--path control): 0 : A separate B--axis offset value is set. 1 : A common B--axis offset value is set. 8250 Axis number used for B--axis control [Data type] Byte [Valid dat
Page 198B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 8251 M code (G101) for specifying the start of first program operation 8252 M code (G102) for specifying the start of second program operation 8253 M code (G103) for specifying the start of third program operation [Data type] 2--word [Valid data range] 6 to 99999999
Page 1991. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Contents 5030 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100) The end command (G110) was specified before the registration start command (G101, G102, or G103) was specified for the B--axis. 5031 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100, G102, While a registration start command
Page 200B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.2.7 Displaying the B--axis Opera- 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) tion State III.11.4.15 Setting and Displaying B--axis Tool Compensation Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.2.6 Displaying the B--axis Ope
Page 2011. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.11 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL/ ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL General When the angular axis makes an angle other than 90 with the perpendicular axis, the angular axis control function controls the distance traveled along each axis according to the inclination angle. For
Page 202B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL D Method of use The angular and perpendicular axes to which angular axis control is to be applied must be specified beforehand, using parameters (No. 8211 and 8212). Parameter AAC (No. 8200#0) enables or disables the angular axis control function. If the function is
Page 2031. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 [Data type] Bit AAC 0 : Does not perform angular axis control. 1 : Performs angular axis control. AZR 0 : The machine tool is moved along the Cartesian axis during manual reference position return along the slanted axis under angular axis control. 1 : The machine too
Page 204B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Note NOTE 1 If an inclination angle close to 0 or 90 is set, an error can occur. A range from 20 to 60 should be used. 2 Before a perpendicular axis reference point return check (G27) can be made, angular axis reference point return operation must be completed
Page 2051. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.12 CHOPPING FUNCTION (M SERIES) General When contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can be used to grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function, while the grinding axis (the axis with the grinding wheel) is being moved vertically, a c
Page 206B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Explanations D Chopping activated by Before chopping can be started, the chopping axis, reference position, signal input upper dead point, lower dead point, and chopping feedrate must be set using the parameter screen (or the chopping screen). Chopping is started onc
Page 2071. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Setting chopping data Set the following chopping data: D Chopping axis: Parameter No. 8370 D Reference point (point R): Parameter No. 8371 D Upper dead point: Parameter No. 8372 D Lower dead point: parameter No. 8373 D Chopping feedrate: Parameter No. 8374 D Maximu
Page 208B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL (2) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from the upper dead point to the lower dead point Previous upper dead point New lower dead point Previous lower dead point The tool first moves to the previous lower dead point, then to the upper dead point, an
Page 2091. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Servo delay When high--speed chopping is performed with the grinding axis, a servo compensation function delay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These delays prevent the tool from actually reaching the specified position. The control unit measures the diff
Page 210B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL D Acceleration Exponential acceleration/deceleration is used for chopping axis. D Mode switching during If the mode is changed during chopping, chopping does not stop. In chopping manual mode, the chopping axis cannot be moved manually. It can, however, be moved manu
Page 2111. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Look--ahead control This function does not support the look--ahead control function. D Program restart When a program contains G codes for starting chopping (G81.1) and stopping chopping (G80), an attempt to restart that program results in a P/S 5050 alarm being ou
Page 212B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Chopping start signal CHPST [Classification] Input signal [Function] Starts and stops chopping. [Operation] Setting this signal to 1 starts chopping. Again setting this signal to 0 during chopping causes chopping to be stopped. NOTE 1 If an attempt to start
Page 2131. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Chopping-- in--progress signal CHPMD [Classification] Output signal [Function] Posts notification of chopping in progress. [Operation] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: · Upon chopping start signal CHPST being set to 1 to start chopping This sig
Page 214B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 8370 Chopping axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to the number of controlled axes This parameter specifies which servo axis the chopping axis corresponds to. 8371 Chopping reference point (R point) 8372 Chopping upper dead point 8373 Chopping lower dead point
Page 2151. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 8376 Chopping compensation scaling factor [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 This parameter specifies a scaling factor used to multiply the compensation value for a servo delay or acceleration/deceleration delay in an chopping operation. Wh
Page 216B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.13 HOBBING MACHINE FUNCTION (M SERIES) General Gears can be cut by turning the workpiece (C--axis) in sync with the rotation of the spindle (hob axis) connected to a hob. Also, a helical gear can be cut by turning the workpiece (C--axis) in sync with the motion of
Page 2171. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Explanations D Setting the C--axis The C--axis (workpiece) is usually the fourth axis. However, any axis can be set as the C--axis by setting the corresponding parameter appropriately (parameter No. 7710). D Maintaining the The synchronization status is maintained pr
Page 218B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL D Direction of the helical 1 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1 gear compensation (a) (b) (c) (d) +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C -- Z -- Z -- Z -- Z C : + C : + C : + C : + Z : + Z : + Z : -- Z : -- P : + P : -- P : + P : -- Compensation Compensation Compensation Co
Page 2191. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D C--axis servo delay The servo delay is proportional to the speed of the hob axis. Therefore, compensation (G82, G83, in a cycle where rough machining and finish machining are performed at G84) different hob axis speeds, compensation for the servo delay is required.
Page 220B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL D Method in which the delay before change is recorded (G82, G83, G84) G82 : Cancels C--axis servo delay compensation. G83 : Applies compensation for the difference between the C--axis servo delay, observed when G83 is specified, and the delay recorded by G84. G84 : R
Page 2211. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Manual setting of When the rotation of the position coder is stopped, setting the one--rotation signal one--rotation signal set signal MSPC to 1 causes the position of the one--rotation signal to shift in the CNC as if the one--rotation signal had been output with
Page 222B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Retract completed signal RTRCTF [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates when retraction is complete. [Operation] The signal becomes 1 when: D Retraction ends. The signal becomes 0 when: D Any movement along the axis occurs once retraction along th
Page 2231. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Sync-- with-- C--axis signal HOBSYN [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates that the hob axis is in sync with the C--axis. [Operation] The signal is 1 when: D The hob axis is in sync with the C--axis (during G81 mode). The signal is 0 when: D The
Page 224B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7700 DPS RTO MLT HDR CMS HBR [Data type] Bit HBR Specifies whether to cancel synchronization between the C--axis and hob axis (G81) when a reset occurs. 0 : Canceled. 1 : Not canceled. CMS Specifies whether to cancel the manually set one--rota
Page 2251. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 JHD Specifies whether to enable C--axis jog and handle feed during synchronization between the C--axis and hob axis (G81 mode). 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. DLY Specifies whether to enable C--axis servo delay compensation based on G84. 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. HBD Sp
Page 226B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL 7712 Acceleration/deceleration time constant applied to the C--axis when it is in sync with the hob axis [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 This parameter specifies an acceleration/deceleration (exponential acceleration/deceleration) time
Page 2271. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7730 RTRx [Data type] Bit axis RTRx Specifies whether to apply the retract function for each axis. 0 : Not applied. 1 : Applied. 7740 Retract speed for each axis [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit
Page 228B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Alarm and message Number Message Description 181 FORMAT ERROR IN G81 The G81 block is not of the correct for- BLOCK mat. 1 T (number of teeth) has not been specified. 2 Data specified for T, L, Q, or P falls outside the valid data range. 182 G81 NOT COMMANDED G83 (C-
Page 2291. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1.14 SIMPLE ELECTRIC GEAR BOX (G80, G81) (M SERIES) General To machine (grind/cut) a gear, the rotation of the workpiece axis connected to a servo motor is synchronized with the rotation of the tool axis (grinding wheel/hob) connected to the spindle motor. To synchro
Page 230B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Explanations D Synchronization control 1 Start of synchronization When synchronization mode is set with G81, the synchronization switch of the EGB function is closed, and synchronization between the tool axis and workpiece axis starts. At this time, synchronization m
Page 2311. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Example timing for starting/terminating synchronization Synchronization start com- mand (G81) Synchronization mode EGB mode confirmation signal SYNMOD Tool axis rotation com- mand (S--M03) Tool axis stop command (M05) Tool axis rotation speed Workpiece axi
Page 232B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL where Compensation angle: Signed absolute value (deg) Z : Amount of travel on the Z--axis after the specification of G81 (mm or inch) P : Signed gear helix angle (deg) T : Number of teeth Q: Module (mm) or diametral pitch (inch- 1) The values of P, T, and Q are to be
Page 2331. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 (e) (f) (g) (h) +Z --C +Z --C +Z --C +Z --C -- Z -- Z -- Z -- Z C : -- C : -- C : -- C : -- Z : + Z : + Z : -- Z : -- P : + P : -- P : + P : -- Compensation Compensation Compensation Compensation direction : + direction : -- direction : -- direction : + D Coordinates
Page 234B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Limitations D Feed hold during For retract movement, the feed hold capability is disabled. retraction D Retraction when alarm is This function does not include a retract function used when an alarm is issued issued. D Rapid traverse during In synchronization mode, a
Page 2351. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 · Performs retraction on the axis specified with bit 0 (RTRx) of parameter No. 7730. The retract speed and amount of retraction are specified with parameter Nos. 7740 and 7741. The retract signal is effective both in automatic operation mode and manual operation mode
Page 236B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter When setting the parameters for the simple electric gear box, note the following: (1) Set SYNMOD (bit 0 of parameter No. 2011) to 1 for the workpiece (4th) axis and EGB axis. (2) If FFALWY (bit 1 of parameter No. 2011) is set to 1, the values set in paramet
Page 2371. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE Set this parameter when applying feed--forward control to rapid traverse also. (3) Other parameters Parameter No. 2003 bit 3 = 1 (P--I control) Parameter No. 2005 bit 1 = 1 (feed--forward control enabled) Parameter No. 2068 = 10000 (feed--forward factor) (4) Sup
Page 238B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7730 RTRx [Data type] Bit axis RTRx Specifies whether the retraction function is effective for each axis. 0 : Retraction is disabled. 1 : Retraction is enabled. 7740 Feedrate during retraction for each axis [Data type] 2--word axis [Unit of da
Page 2391. AXIS CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7772 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about tool axis [Data type] 2--word [Data unit] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the number of pulses per rotation about the tool axis (on the spindle side), for the position
Page 240B--63003EN--1/02 1. AXIS CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.8 Simple electric gear box 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (G80, G81) (B--63014EN) 221
Page 2412. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 222
Page 242B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP General If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, the machine movement stops in a moment. Red EMERGENCY STOP Fig. 2.1 (a) EMERGENCY STOP This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the m
Page 2432. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Emergency stop limit switch Emergency stop +X =X +Y =Y +Z =Z +4 =4 Relay power Emergency stop temporary release supply EMG SK Spark killer Fig. 2.1 (b) Connection of emergency stop limit switch The distance from the position where the dynamic brake is a
Page 244B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X008 *ESP #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G008 *ESP Reference item FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR ∼ series B--65142E DESCRIPTIONS 225
Page 2452. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.2 CNC READY SIGNAL General When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the CNC ready signal is set to 1. Signal CNC Ready Signal MA [Classification] Output signal [Function] The CNC ready signal reports that the CNC is ready. [O
Page 246B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Servo Ready Signal SA [Classification] Output signal [Function] Signal SA turns to “1” when the servo system is ready to operate. For an axis that is to be braked, release the brake when this signal is sent and apply the brake when this signal
Page 2472. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK 2.3.1 Overtravel Signal General When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed. Signal Overt
Page 248B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION The following shows the deceleration distance at overtravel. (i) Rapid traverse Command pulse deceleration V Servo system delay VR t *+Lα limit switch t1 t2 TR TR 1 L1=VR(t1+t2+ +TS) · [mm or inch] 2 60000 L1:Deceleration distance VR: Rapid traverse spe
Page 2492. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 D Releasing overtravel Press the reset button to reset the alarm after moving the tool to the safety direction by manual operation. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 G116 *--L8 *--L7 *--L6 *--L5 *--L4 *-
Page 250B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1 General When the tool tries to exceed a stored stroke check, an alarm is displayed and the tool is decelerated and stopped. When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved in the reverse
Page 2512. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G007 RLSOT EXLM G110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1 G112 --LM8 --LM7 --LM6 --LM5 --LM4 --LM3 --LM2 --LM1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1300 BFA LZR LMS BFA LZR LMS [Data type] Bit LMS The EXLM signal f
Page 252B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION WARNING 1 For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must be set. 2 When the parameters are set as follows, the stroke becomes infinite: parameter 1320 < parameter 1321 For movement along the axis for which infinite stroke is set, only incre
Page 2532. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 Parameter LZR (bit 6 of No. 1300) selects whether each check becomes effective after the power is turned on and manual reference position return or automatic reference position return by G28 has been performed or immediately after the power
Page 254B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.3.3 Stored Stroke Check 2, 3 General Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2,and stored stroke check 3. Stored stroke check 3 Stored stroke check 2 Stored stroke check 1 : Forbidden ar
Page 2552. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Stored stroke check 2 Parameters (Nos. 1322, 1323) or commands set these boundaries. Inside or outside the area of the check can be set as the forbidden area. Parameter OUT (No. 1300#0) selects either inside or outside as the forbidden area. In case of
Page 256B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION A(X1, Y1, Z1) B(X2, Y2, Z2) X1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2 X1 --X2> ≠ (In least command increment) Y1 --Y2> ≠ (In least command increment) Z1 --Z2> ≠ (n least command increment) ≠ is the distance the tool travels in 8 ms. It is 2000 in least command increments whe
Page 2572. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 B The position of the tool after reference position return b A a Forbidden area boundary Fig. 2.3.3 (h) Setting the forbidden area (M series) D Forbidden area over-- Area can be set in piles. lapping Fig. 2.3.3 (i) Setting the forbidden area overlapping
Page 258B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION D Change from G23 to When G23 is switched to G22 in the forbidden area, the following results. G22 in a forbidden area (1)When the forbidden area is inside, an alarm is informed in the next move. (2)When the forbidden area is outside, an alarm is inform
Page 2592. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 BFA When a command that exceeds a stored stroke check 1, 3 is issued 0: An alarm is generated after the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded. 1: An alarm is generated before the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1310 OT3x OT2x [Data type]
Page 260B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Alarm and message Number Message Description 502 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n--th axis (axis 1--8) + side stored stroke check 2. (Parameter No.1322 ) 503 OVER TRAVEL : --n Exceeded the n--th axis (axis 1--8) -- side stored stroke check 2. (Parameter
Page 2612. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.6.3 Stroke check 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.6.3 Stroke check (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.6.3 Stroke check (For Machining Cent
Page 262B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.3.4 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier (T series) General The chuck/tailstock barrier function prevents damage to the machine by checking whether the tool tip interferes either the chuck or tailstock. Specify an area into which the tool may not enter (entry--inh
Page 2632. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter D Profile of a chuck 1330 Profile of a chuck [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 or 1 0 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner surface 1 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer surface 1331 Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (L) 13
Page 264B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Chuck which holds a workpiece on Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer surface (TY=1) the inner surface (TY=0) X X L A L A W1 L1 W W W1 CX CX L1 Z Z CZ CZ Zero point of Zero point of the workpiece the workpiece coordinate coordinate system system S
Page 2652. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 1341 Length of a tailstock (L) 1342 Diameter of a tail stock (D) 1343 Length of a tailstock (L1) 1344 Diameter of a tail stock (D1) 1345 Length of a tailstock (L2) 1346 Diameter of a tail stock (D2) 1347 Diameter of the hole of a tailstock (D3) [Data ty
Page 266B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Symbol Description TZ Z--axis coordinate of a tailstock L Length of a tailstock D Diameter of a tailstock (diameter input) L1 Length of a tailstock (1) D1 Diameter of a tailstock (1) (diameter input) L2 Length of a tailstock (2) D2 Diameter of a tailsto
Page 2672. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Warning WARNING 1 If the setting for the forbidding area is invalid as follows, the area may not be forbidden: 1) In the setting of the chuck shape, the jaw length (parameter No. 1331) is less than the grasp length (parameter No. 1333) or the jaw width
Page 268B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.3.5 Tool Post Interference Check (T series, Two--path Control) General When two tool posts machine the same workpiece simultaneously, the tool posts can approach each other very closely. If the two tool posts interfere with each other due to a program
Page 2692. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Tool post interference alarm signal TIALM [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates that the tool post interference alarm is activated. [Output condition] This signal goes “1” when: (i) The control unit judges that the two tool posts
Page 270B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F064 TIALM TICHK Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8140 ZCL IFE IFM ITO TY1 TY0 [Data type] Bit TY0, TY1 This parameter specifies the relationship between the coordinate systems of the two tool posts. (1) When TY1=
Page 2712. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 IFE Specifies whether interference between tool posts is checked. 0: Checked 1: Not checked ZCL Specifies whether interference along the Z axis is checked while checking interference between tool posts. 0: Checked 1: Not checked (Only interference along
Page 272B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Alarm and message Number Message Description 169 ILLEGAL TOOL GEOME- Incorrect tool figure data in interfer- TRY DATA ence check. 508 INTERFERENCE : +X An interference alarm has generated INTERFERENCE : +Z when X or Z axis is moving in the pos- itive di
Page 2732. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.3.6 Stroke Limit Check Before Move General In the automatic operation before the move command by a given block, the position of the end point is determined by the current position of the machine and by a specified amount of travel. And it is determine
Page 274B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Example 2) End point Inhibited area defined by stored stroke check 2 or 3 a The tool is stopped at point a according Start point to stored stroke check 2 or 3. Inhibited area defined by stored stroke check 2 or 3 End point Immediately upon movement comm
Page 2752. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 D Cyrindrical interpolation In cylindrical interpolation mode, no check is made. mode D Polar coordinate In polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made. interpolation mode D Angular axis control When the angulalr axis control option is selecte
Page 276B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Alarm and message Number Message Contents The stroke limit check made prior to perform- ing movement reveals that the end point of a 510 OVER TRAVEL : +n block is located within the stroke limit inhib- ited area in the positive direction of the n-- axis
Page 2772. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.4 ALARM SIGNAL General When an alarm is triggered in the CNC, the alarm is indicated on the screen, and the alarm signal is set to 1. If the voltage level of the memory backup battery falls to below a specified level while the CNC is turned off, the b
Page 278B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 NPA [Data type] Bit NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message is entered 0 : The display shifts to the alarm or message screen. 1 : The display does not shift to the alarm or message s
Page 2792. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.5 START LOCK/ INTERLOCK General This signal disables machine movement along axes. When this signal is input during movement along axes, the tool movement is decelerated, then stopped. Signal Start lock signal STLK(T series) [Classification] In
Page 280B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION All axes Interlock signal *IT [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal is used to inhibit the machine from moving, and is effective regardless of the selected mode. [Operation] When the *IT signal is “0”, the axis movement is deceler
Page 2812. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Interlock signal for each axis *IT1  *IT8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals disable feed along axes on an axis--by--axis basis. A separate interlock signal is provided for each controlled axis. The number at the end of each s
Page 282B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G007 STLK G008 *IT G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1 G134 --MIT4 --MIT3 --MIT2 --MIT1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X004 --MIT2 +MIT2 --MIT1 +MIT1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Page 2832. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.6 MODE SELECTION General The mode select signal is a code signal consisting of the three bits MD1, MD2, and MD4. The seven modes -- memory edit (EDIT), memory operation (MEM), manual data input (MDI), manual handle/incremental feed (HANDLE/INC), manua
Page 284B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION For this mode switching, only MD2 should change from 0 to 1. If a transient signal status change occurs in a signal other than MD2 during mode switching, however, another mode (manual continuous feed mode, for example) is set between automatic operation
Page 2852. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Operation mode check signal MMDI, MMEM , MRMT, MEDT, MH, MINC, MJ, MREF, MTCHIN [Classification] Output signal [Function] The currently selected operation mode is output. [Operation] The following lists the relationship between the mode s
Page 286B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Note NOTE Precautions on modes and mode switching 1 In the MDI mode, the STL signal turns to “0” and the CNC stops at the end of execution of the commands input from the CRT/MDI panel, but the SPL signal does not turn to “1”. Therefore, another command
Page 2872. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 4 Manual operation in TEACH IN JOG mode a) When bit 1 (THD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 0 Only jog feed is possible. b) When bit 1 (THD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1 Both jog feed and manual handle feed are possible, provided the manual ha
Page 288B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION NOTE 6 When the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode is selected while the CNC is operating in the MEM or MDI mode, the automatic or MDI operation stops, the STL signal turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to “1”, and the CNC enters the HANDL
Page 2892. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 7 When the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected during RMT, MEM or MDI mode operation, operation stops, the STL signal turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to “1”, and the CNC enters the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode. Manual feed by feed ax
Page 290B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION NOTE 8 The mode switching operation is summarized in the time chart below (Fig. 2.6 (f)). M M M M D D D Disable because of Disable because of feed hold state of MDI operation possible here- feed hold state of automatic operation MDI operation after H /
Page 2912. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.7 PATH SELECTION/ DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES (TWO--PATH CONTROL) General Path selection specifies whether operations performed using the MDI panel are for path 1 or path 2. The operations, as used here, include displaying and setting data items (s
Page 292B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8100 IAL RST [Data type] Bit RST Reset key on the MDI panel 0 : Effective for both paths 1 : Effective for the path selected by the path select signal IAL When an alarm is raised in one tool post in the automatic operat
Page 2932. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.8 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL General The table below lists the status output signals for notifying the state of the CNC. See the sections listed in the table for details of each signal. Signal name Symbol Reference section Alarm signal AL 2.4 Battery alarm
Page 294B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION NOTE 1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The rapid traverse in manual operation also includes the rapid traverse i
Page 2952. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.9 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL General The German VDE safety standard requires that the motor be deactivated when the safety guard is opened. By using the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal, however, the CNC can be restarted without resetting, even if the s
Page 296B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G066 IGNVRY G192 IGVRY8 IGVRY7 IGVRY6 IGVRY5 IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1804 SAK [Data type] Bit SAK When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal IGNVRY is 1, or when the VRDY OFF alarm
Page 2972. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.10 ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION General Machine collision, defective, and damaged cutters cause a large load torque on the servo and spindle motors, compared with normal rapid traverse or cutting feed. This function detects a load torque on the motors and
Page 298B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION D Parameter setting The following flowcharts explain how to specify parameters for the abnormal load detection function. (1) Servo axis Abnormal load detection function is available. Abnormal load detection No. 2016#0 = 0 function to be used? No Yes No.
Page 2992. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Servo axis abnormal load detected signal ABTQSV [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs the PMC that an abnormal load was detected on a servo axis. [Output condition] This signal becomes “1” if: S An abnormal load is detected f
Page 300B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0090 ABTSP2 ABTSP1 ABTQSV Parameter (1) Parameter common to servo axes and spindles 1880 Timer for abnormal load detection alarm [Data type] Word [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 (If 0 is set, 200
Page 3012. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2051 Velocity control observer [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 [Setting value] 3329 When using the velocity loop observer (by setting bit 2 of parameter No. 2003 to 1), set 510 in this parameter. 2103 Retraction distance upon the det
Page 302B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION (3) Spindle parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 4015 SPLDMT [Data type] Bit axis SPLDMT Spindle load torque monitor function 0 : The spindle load torque monitor function is disabled. 1 : The spindle load torque monitor function is enabled. 4247 Magnetic
Page 3032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message (1) Servo axis Number Message Description 409 Servo alarm: Abnormal load An abnormal load was detected on a servo detected on axis n motor, or on a spindle motor during Cs mode. To release the alarm, use RESET. (2) Spindle Number Messa
Page 304B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION [Completion code] 0: The load torque data was read normally. 4: Incorrect data was specified as a data attribute, that is a value other than --1 or 1 to n (number of axes) was specified. Alternatively, a value greater than the number of controllable axe
Page 3052. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 (2) Spindle [Input data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 211 2 (Completion code) (Not to be set) 4 (Data length) (Not to be set) 6 (Data number) 1 8 (M = 1 to n: Specifies separately (Data attribute) for each axis whether data for it is to be M
Page 306B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 211 2 (Completion code) ? (Refer to the above description about the completion code.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 2*n, where n is the num- ber of specified axes) 6 (Data number) 1 8 (Data attribute) M (
Page 3072. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 2.11 SERVO/SPINDLE MOTOR SPEED DETECTION General The servo axis and spindle motor speeds are monitored. If the speed of an axis exceeds a preset maximum (specified by parameter setting), the corresponding signal is output to a Y address (specified by pa
Page 308B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal Motor speed detection function enable signal MSDFON [Classification] Input signal [Function] Enables the motor speed detection function. [Operation] When this signal is 1, the motor speed detection function is enabled. The servo/spindle
Page 3092. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Spindle motor speed detection signals DSP1, DSP2, DSP3 [Classification] Output signal [Function] Report the motor speed status of each of the axes controlled by spindle motors. [Operation] E
Page 310B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G016 MSDFON #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Y (n+00 DSV8 DSV7 DSV6 DSV5 DSV4 DSV3 DSV2 DSV1 Y (n+1) DSP3 DSV2 DSV1 Reserved Parameter 1890 Servo motor speed for detection NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power mu
Page 3112. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 specified in this parameter and (Y address +1) to indicate whether speeds exceed the values set in the parameters. WARNING 1 Be sure to specify a Y address that is not used with a PMC sequence program (ladder). 2 When controlling two path lathe, ensure
Page 312B--63003EN--1/02 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Note NOTE 1 Spindle motor speed detection is enabled only for serial spindles. 2 The relationship between servo motor speed detection signals DSV1 to DSV8 and the servo motors depends on the servo axis number (servo connector number) set in parameter No
Page 3133. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 3 MANUAL OPERATION 294
Page 314B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.1 JOG FEED/ INCREMENTAL FEED General D Jog feed In the jog mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection signal to “1” on the machine operator’s panel continuously moves the tool along the selected axis in the selected direction. Manual operation is allowed
Page 3153. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal The following signals determine the way in which jog feed or incremental feed is executed. Selection Jog feed Incremental feed Mode selection MD1, MD2, MD4, MJ MD1, MD2, MD4, MINC Selection of the axis to move +J1 --J1, +J1, J1 +J2, +J2 --J2, J2 +J3, +J3 -
Page 316B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION [Operation] When the signal is high, the control unit operates as described below. D When jog feed or incremental feed is allowed, the control unit moves the specified axis in the specified direction. D In jog feed, the control unit continues to feed the axis whi
Page 3173. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Incremental feed mode (TEACH IN HANDLE mode) Reset +J1 1st axis move +J1 is inef- fective dur- Axis is fed again Move is stopped by ing this resetting after signals have period. turned to “0” once. Manual Feedrate Override Signal *JV0 -- *JV15 [Classificati
Page 318B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects a rapid traverse rate for jog feed or incremental feed. [Operation] When the signal turns to “1”, the control unit operates as described below: D The control unit e
Page 3193. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1002 JAX [Data type] Bit JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in jog feed, manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return 0 : 1 axis 1 : 3 axes #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 RPD [Data type] Bit RPD Manual rapid
Page 320B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 -- 240000 30 -- 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 -
Page 3213. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Warning WARNING For incremental feeding along an axis under diameter programming, the tool moves in units of the diameter. Note NOTE 1 Time constant and method of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in programmed com
Page 322B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEED General In the manual handle feed mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse generator. Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection signal. The minimum distance the tool is
Page 3233. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Manual Handle Feed Axis Selection Signals [Classification] Input signal D (M series) HS1A -- HS1D [Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B, C, and D is provided for each manual pulse generator. (Up
Page 324B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Manual handle feed axis selection Feed axis HSnD#1 HSnC#1 HSnB#1 HSnA#1 0 0 0 0 No selection (no axis is used for path 1) 0 0 0 1 1st axis of path 1 0 0 1 0 2nd axis of path 1 0 0 1 1 3rd axis of path 1 0 1 0 0 4th axis of path 1 0 1 0 1 5th a
Page 3253. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 WARNING 1 Because the least input increment is used as the units for manual handle and incremental feed, the same value represents a different distance depending on whether the metric or inch input system is used. 2 For an axis under diameter programming, the too
Page 326B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION The following table lists the relationships between each manual handle feed travel distance select signal and the travel distance specified by the signal. Manual handle feed travel Travel distance distance select signal MP2 MP1 MP22 MP21 Manual handle feed Manual
Page 3273. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 THD Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG mode 0: Invalid 1: Valid HPF When a manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued, 0: The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses corresponding to the excess are ignored. (The g
Page 328B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION 7113 Manual handle feed magnification m [Data type] Word [Unit of data] One time [Valid data range] 1 to 127 This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed movement selection signal MP2 is on. 7114 Manual handle feed magnification n [Data type] Wor
Page 3293. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE Parameter Nos. 7131 to 7136 are valid only in the Series 20i. Warning WARNING Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such as x100 moves the tool too fast or the tool may not stop immediately after the handle is no longer rotated or the distan
Page 330B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.3 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION General Rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation can increase the distance traveled by the amount corresponding to the handle feed. The axis to which the handle interrupt is applied is selected using the manual
Page 3313. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 D Series 20i manual handle In the Series 20i, up to three (T series) or four (F series) manual handle interrupt pulse generators can be used. So, the following manual handle interrupt select signals are also valid for the Series 20i. HS3IA to HS3ID
Page 332B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Warning WARNING The travel distance by handle interruption is determined according to the amount by which the manual pulse generator is turned and the handle feed magnification (x1, x10, xM, xN). Since this movement is not accelerated or decelerated, it is very d
Page 3333. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 3.4 The tool axis direction handle feed function allows the tool to be moved through a specified distance by handle feed in the axis direction of the TOOL AXIS tool, tilted by rotating the rotation axes. DIRECTION HANDLE Tool axis direction handle feed function B
Page 334B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION (1) A--C axis type (2) B--C axis type Z Z (Tool axis) (Tool axis) C C B X Y X Y A (3) A--B axis (A--axis master) type (4) A--B axis (B--axis master) type Z Z (Tool axis) (Tool axis) B B X Y X A Y A Output pulse (Hp) distribution by the manual pulse generator to t
Page 3353. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 For tool axis direction handle feed B, the coordinates (angular displacements) of the rotation axes that determine the direction of the tool axis can be set. These coordinates are set using bits 3 and 4 (3D1X and 3D2X) of parameter No. 7104, and parameter Nos. 71
Page 336B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION CXC Tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed is performed with: 0 : 5--axis machine. 1 : 4--axis machine. 3D1 When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed function is used, the c
Page 3373. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 D Axis selection in the tool axis direction handle feed mode 7121 Axis selection in tool axis direction handle feed mode [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets an axis number for the manual handle feed axis selectio
Page 338B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.6 Tool axis direction handle feed / 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) Tool axis direction handle feed B (B--63014EN) 3.4.2 Tool Axis Perpendicular Direction Handle Feed Function General This function moves the
Page 3393. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 (1) A--C axis type (2) B--C axis type Z Z (Tool axis) (Tool axis) C C B A X Y X Y Output pulse (Hp) distribution by the manual pulse generator to the X--axis, Y--axis, and Z--axis for the four types is expressed below. (1) A--C axis type (X axis direction) Xp = H
Page 340B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Signal Tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode signal RGHTH [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal selects tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode. When the following conditions are all satisfied, tool axis direction h
Page 3413. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 3D1 When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the first rotation axis are: 0: The machine coordinates when the tool axis direction handle feed mode or tool axis perpendicular dir
Page 342B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Axis selection setting in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis 7141 Direction of the X--axis in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis 7142 Direction of the Y--axis in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendi
Page 3433. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 The basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No. 1022 (plane selection). The rotation axes A, B, and C are determined by parameter No. 1020 (axis name). 2 If one of the two axes specified by a type set depending on the axis configuration doe
Page 344B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.5 MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION General In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operations are enabled in addition to the conventional feed operation along a specified single axis (X--axis, Y--axis, Z--axis, and so forth) based on
Page 3453. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 D Data setting (a) Input data (PMC-- SB/SC - > CNC) Lines and circles are defined by setting the data listed below. Num- Setting Data name ber of bytes Linear feed Circular feed R960 1 (Reserve) Do not use. (1) R961 1 Linear or circular feed selection Set value D
Page 346B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION (1) Setting for linear feed Let us assume that P is the length of a line segment starting at the origin and perpendicular to a given line, and ° is an angle formed by the perpendicular line and the positive X--axis. The given line is defined as: X⋅ cos° + Y⋅ sin°
Page 3473. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 1) Select linear feed. (R961) Set R961 to 1. 2), 3) Specify the approach direction. (R962 to R969) Specify the X and Y components (Ix, Iy) of a unit vector (+cos° , +sin° ) or (--cos° , --sin° ), which is parallel to perpendicular op, with four bytes, using the v
Page 348B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION 7) Notify of changes in the setting (R979). Reset R979 to 0. CAUTION 1 Line and circle definitions (data items 1 to 6) can be set or changed during manual operation mode (manual handle or jog feed mode). This data notifies the CNC when the definitions are changed
Page 3493. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 1) Specify circular feed and the direction of circle rotation. (R961) Set R961 to 2 or 3. If R961 is 2, the tool moves along the circle clockwise, when the guidance handle is rotated in the forward direction. If R961 is 3, the tool moves along the circle counterc
Page 350B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Where (inside or outside of the circle) the prohibited area is set is determined according to the setting of R974 (which is to be machined, the inside or outside of the circle). If the inside of the circle is to be machined, the prohibited area is outside the cir
Page 3513. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 7) Notify of changes in the setting (R979). Reset R979 to 0. 8) The values of R980 to R983 (distance to a given line or circle) are output as 0. D Manual handle feed In manual handle feed, the tool can be moved along a specified axis (X--axis, Y--axis, Z--axis, .
Page 352B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION (3) Circular feed (simultaneous 2--axis control) By turning a manual handle, the tool can be moved from the current position along the concentric circle that has the same center as a specified circle on a simultaneous 2--axis control basis. This manual handle is
Page 3533. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 (2) Linear feed (simultaneous 2--axis control) By defining a straight line beforehand, the tool can be moved as follows: D While a feed axis and its direction are selected using the feed axis direction select switch, the tool moves along a straight line parallel
Page 354B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Manual feedrate override signals (*JV0 to *JV15) can be used to apply an override (0.01% to 655.34%) to the feedrate. Limitations D Mirror image Never use the mirror image function when performing manual operation. (Perform manual operation when the mirror image
Page 3553. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Feed Axis and Direction Selection Signal +J1 - +J8 --J1 - - J8 +Jg, --Jg, +Ja, --Ja [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects a desired feed axis and direction in jog feed or incremental feed. The sign (+ or --) in the signal name indicat
Page 356B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Manual Handle Feed Axis Selection Signals [Classification] Input signal D (M series) HS1A -- HS1D [Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B, C, and D is provided for each manual pulse generator. (Up to thre
Page 3573. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Code signals A, B, C, and D correspond to the feed axes as listed in the following table: Manual handle feed axis selection Feed axis HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA 0 0 0 0 No selection (None of axis is fed) 0 0 0 1 1st axis 0 0 1 0 2nd axis 0 0 1 1 3rd axis 0 1 0 0 4th axi
Page 358B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Parameter 1410 Dry run rate/Jog feedrate (linear feed, circular feed) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 -- 15000 6 -- 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inc
Page 3593. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 MPX Specifies how the manual handle feed travel distance select signals are to be used as follows: 0 : The signals (MP1 and MP2; bits 4 and 5 of G019) for the first manual pulse generator are used for the first to fourth (F series) or third (T series) pulse gener
Page 360B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION 7131 Manual handle feed magnification M2/second manual pulse generator 7132 Manual handle feed magnification N2/second manual pulse generator 7133 Manual handle feed magnification M3/third manual pulse generator 7134 Manual handle feed magnification N3/third manu
Page 3613. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 3.6 MANUAL RIGID TAPPING (M SERIES) General For execution of rigid tapping, set rigid mode, then switch to handle mode and move the tapping axis with a manual handle. Manual rigid tapping is enabled by setting bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No. 5203 to 1. D Basic Proce
Page 362B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Arbitrary tapping axis By setting bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 to 1, an arbitrary tapping axis can be selected. In this case, specify a G code for plane selection and tapping axis address when rigid mode is set in MDI mode. D Specification of M29 and In an
Page 3633. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.8 MANUAL RIGID TAPPING 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL 9.11 RIGID TAPPING (This manual) Series 20i OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.7 MANUAL HANDLE RIGID (For Milling) (B--63384EN) TAPPI
Page 364B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.7 MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND General The manual numeric command function allows data programmed through the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system is ready for jog feed, a manual numeric command can be executed. The following eight functions are suppor
Page 3653. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE When the manual rapid traverse selection signal RT is 0, the jog feedrate for each axis is clamped such that a parameter--set feedrate determined by bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 as shown below, is not exceeded. LRP = 0 : Manual rapid traverse rate for e
Page 366B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION D 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference The tool returns directly to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position without position return (G30) passing through any intermediate points, regardless of the specified amount of travel. To select a reference position, specify P2, P3,
Page 3673. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 D B codes After address B, specify a numeric value of no more than the number of (second auxiliary digits specified by parameter No. 3033. functions) NOTE 1 B codes can be named U, V, W, A, or C by setting parameter No. 3460. If the new name is the same as an axi
Page 368B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7001 JSL [Data type] Bit JSL Specifies whether to output automatic operation signal STL during automatic operation based on a manual numeric command. 0 : Not output. 1 : Output. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7002 JBF JTF JSF JMF [Data
Page 3693. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 3.8 HANDLE-- SYNCHRONOUS FEED (Series 20i) General Generally, tools are fed at a program--specified feedrate or at a feedrate that matches a dry run feedrate in cutting feed blocks (such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 and G03)) duri
Page 370B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Signal Handle-- synchronous feed signal [Classification] Input signal HDLF [Function] This signal selects handle--synchronous feed. To put another way, it causes the cutting feedrate used during automatic operation to be synchronized with the rotation of
Page 3713. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 1 Selecting a feed axis for manual handle feed The following table lists the relationships of code signals (A, B, C, and D) with feed axes. Manual handle feed axis select signal Feed axis HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA 0 0 0 0 Not selected (no feed axis) 0 0 0 1 First axis
Page 372B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Manual handle feed travel distance select signals MP1, MP2 MP21, MP22 MP31, MP32 MP41, MP42 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Each of these signals selects the tool’s travel distance per pulse from a manu
Page 3733. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Feed zero signal FEED 0 [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the feedrate command (F command) is 0. [Output condition] Outputting the feed zero signal (FEED0) requires that parameter FC0 (bit 7 of parameter No. 1404) be se
Page 374B--63003EN--1/02 3. MANUAL OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7100 MPX [Data type] Bit MPX Specifies how the manual handle feed travel distance select signals are to be used, as follows: 0 : The signals (MP1 and MP2; bits 4 and 5 of G019) for the first manual pulse generator are used for th
Page 3753. MANUAL OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 The following table lists the relationships between each manual handle feed travel distance select signal valid for an individual manual pulse generator and the parameter No. for specifying its magnification. State of bit 5 of Valid manual handle Parameter for se
Page 376B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 357
Page 3774. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZMI (bit 5 of No. 1006) for each axis by turning the feed axis and direction select signal to “1” in the manual reference position return mode,
Page 378B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Basic Procedure for (1) Select the JOG mode or TEACH IN JOG mode, and set the manual Manual Reference reference position return selection signal ZRN to “1”. Position Return (2) Feed a target axis toward the reference position by making an appropri
Page 3794. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Installation conditions When installing the deceleration limit switch for manual reference for deceleration limit position return, ensure that following conditions are satisfied: switch Deceleration limit Deceleration limit operation position rele
Page 380B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT By reversing the formula above, the following formula gives the feedrate F needed to set the servo position error to 128 when the servo loop gain G is 30 s- 1 and the detection unit U is 1 μm: 128 × 60 × 30 F= 1000 =230 [mm/min] Therefore, when th
Page 3814. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Manual reference position return selection check signal MREF [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal reports that manual reference position return has been selected once. [Output condition] This signal turns to “1” when: Man
Page 382B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT NOTE When reference position return is selected, an axis whose reference position return end signal is already “1” or an axis whose reference position return end signal was set “1” upon completion of reference position return is locked, and moveme
Page 3834. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 [Output condition] These signals turn to “1” when: D Manual reference position returns is completed, and the current position is in the in--position area. D Automatic reference position return (G28) is completed, and the current position is in the
Page 384B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1002 JAX [Data type] Bit JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in JOG feed, manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return 0 : 1 axis 1 : 3 axes #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1005 ZRNx [Data type] Bit
Page 3854. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 1240 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machine coordinate system NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Incre
Page 386B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT NOTE This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201#1 is set to 1. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1300 LZR [Data type] Bit LZR Checking of stored stroke limit 1 during the time from power--on to the manual reference position return 0 : The stroke lim
Page 3874. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 < Conditions > D When there is a remaining distance to travel. D When an auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindle--speed function, tool function) is being executed. D When a dwell or cycle such as a canned cycle is being executed. 1821
Page 388B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 1850 Grid shift for each axis [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] --99999999 to 99999999 A grid shift is set for each axis. To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in this
Page 3894. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) POSITION RETURN (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) POSITION RETURN Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S M
Page 390B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.2 SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGS General This function moves the tool near around the reference position set for each axis in the manual continuous feed mode. Then it sets the reference position in the reference position return mode
Page 3914. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Manual reference position return mode +J1 or --J1 Grid . . . . . . ZP1 ZRF1 Feedrate FL rate The following figure shows the positional relation between the reference position and the point to which the tool is positioned by manual continuous feed.
Page 392B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1002 DLZ JAX [Data type] Bit JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual continuous feed, manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return 0 : 1 axis 1 : 3 axes DLZ Function setting the refere
Page 3934. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 ZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initial backlash at power--on 0 : Positive direction 1 : Negative direction #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1201 ZCL ZPI ZPR [Data type] Bit ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system
Page 394B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm (input in mm) Linear axis 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch (input in inches) Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] --99999999 to 99999999 Set the coo
Page 3954. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1800 OZR [Data type] Bit OZR When manual reference position return is attempted in the halt state during automatic operation (feed hold stop state) under any of the conditions listed below: 0: Manual reference position retu
Page 396B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT WARNING When bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value ten times greater than the value set in this parameter is used to make the check. Example:When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, refere
Page 3974. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 4.3 REFERENCE POSITION SHIFT General When reference position return is performed using a grid method, the reference position can be shifted by a parameter--set distance without having to move the deceleration dog. This function is enabled by setti
Page 398B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT (3) Perform reference position return again. Then, the tool stops when it reaches the reference position. Direction of reference position return Deceleration dog LSFT | | | | |   Grid point Reference position (stop position) Parameter #7 #6 #5 #
Page 3994. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message D Diagnostic display 0302 Distance from the position where the deceleration dog is turned off to the first grid point [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] 0.001 mm (metric output), 0.0001 inch (inch output) [Valid data range
Page 400B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.4 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General The G28 command positions the tool to the reference position, via the specified intermediate point, along the specified axis, then sets the completion signal for reference position return (see Section 4.1) to
Page 4014. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 405 SERVO ALARM: Position control system fault. Due to (WRONG ZRN) an CNC or servo system fault in the reference position return, there is the possibility that reference position re- turn could not be e
Page 402B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.6 REFERENCE POSITION 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.6 REFERENCE POSITION (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.6 REFERENCE POSITION (For
Page 4034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 4.5 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN/3RD, 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General The G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position, via the specified intermediate point, along the specified axis. Then, it sets the completio
Page 404B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ZP 2 1 1 : Return end signal for the first axis 2 : Return end signal for the second axis 3 : Return end signal for the third axis : : 2 : Second reference position return 3 : Third reference position return 4 : Fourth reference position return [O
Page 4054. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RE- Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded TURN COMMAND for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position re- turn command. Correct program. Caution CAUTION 1 If the G30 command is issued in
Page 406B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.6 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General It is possible to return the tool to the floating reference position by commanding the G30.1. The floating reference position is located on the machine and can be a reference position of some sort of
Page 4074. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Floating reference position return end signal FRP1 to FRP8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notify the system that the tool is at the floating reference position on a controlled axis. A floating reference position return end
Page 408B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1201 FPC [Data type] Bit FPC When the floating reference position is specified using soft keys on the current position display screen 0 : The value of the displayed relative position is not preset. (In other words
Page 4094. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 4.7 BUTT--TYPE REFERENCE POSITION SETTING General This function automates the procedure of butting the tool against a mechanical stopper on an axis to set a reference position. The purpose of this function is to eliminate the variations in referen
Page 410B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Cycle operation When no reference position has been set (APZx, bit 4 of parameter No. 1815, is 0), operations (A) to (E), below, are performed automatically to set a reference position. Mechanical stopper Current position (A)The tool is moved alon
Page 4114. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Mechanical stopper The direction, feedrate, and torque are all specified with parameters. (E)After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper end on the axis, the tool is withdrawn in the direction opposite to the butting direction, along the axis fo
Page 412B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT After the reference When the reference position has already been set (when APZx, bit 4 of position is set parameter No. 1815, is 1), performing butt--type reference position setting causes the tool to be positioned to the reference position at the
Page 4134. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Torque limit reach signals for butt--type reference position setting CLRCH1 to CLRCH8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals are used to post notification of the torque limit having been reached for each correspondin
Page 414B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT [Valid data range] --99999999 to 99999999 When the butt--type reference position setting function is used, this parameter sets a distance an axis, along which withdrawal is performed after the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanica
Page 4154. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 When the butt--type reference position setting function is used, this parameter sets the feedrate used to hit the stopper on an axis for a second time. 7185 Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and second butting operations) in butt--type refe
Page 416B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.8 LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESSING REFERENCE MARKS General The linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks has reference marks (one--rotation signals) at intervals that change at a constant rate. By determining the reference mark
Page 4174. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 JOG ZRN +J1 Reference mark ZRF1 Feedrate FL feedrate FL feedrate FL feedrate Fig. 4.8 (b) Time chart for reference position establishment Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1815 DCLx OPTx [Data type] Bit axis OPTx As a position detector: 0 : A sepa
Page 418B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 1882 Intervals of mark 2 of the linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks. [Data type] 2--word axis [Unit of data] Detection units [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Sets the intervals of mark 2 of the linear scale with absolute addressi
Page 4194. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 [Example parameter setting] When the following scale is used with an IS--B, millimeter machine Scale origin Positive Reference position Negative direction direction A B Mark1=Mark2 Mark1 Mark2 Mark1 Mark1 Mark2 Mark1 Mark2 Mark1 Mark2 Mark1 20.000
Page 420B--63003EN--1/02 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Caution CAUTION 1 In the following cases, the machine moves to the reference position without establishing the reference position as described above: S Axial movement is performed in REF mode when the reference position has already been establishe
Page 4214. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 If automatic reference position return (G28) is specified when the reference position has not been established, the reference position is first established as described above, after which the machine is positioned to the reference posi
Page 422B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION 403
Page 4235. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 5.1 CYCLE START/ FEED HOLD General D Start of automatic When automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in which operation (cycle start) memory (MEM) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT), or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the automatic oper
Page 424B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Halt of automatic When the feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the operation (feed hold) CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation. At the same time, cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0 and feed hold lamp signal SPL is s
Page 4255. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Cycle start signal ST [Classification] Input signal [Function] Starts automatic operation. [Operation] When signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in memory (MEM) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT) or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the cycle st
Page 426B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Feed hold lamp signal SPL [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that feed hold state is entered. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 or 0, according to the state of the CNC, as listed in Table 5.1. Table 5.1 Status of opera
Page 4275. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message D Self--diagnosis During automatic operation, the machine may sometimes show no information movement while no alarm is detected. In that case, the CNC may be performing processing or waiting for the occurrence of an event. The state of the CN
Page 428B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.2 RESET AND REWIND General The CNC is reset and enters the reset state in the following cases: 1. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0 2. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1 3. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1 4. W
Page 4295. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 The following parameters are also used to select how to handle processing for CNC data when the CNC is reset. S Bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No. 3203 Whether programs created in MDI mode are erased or stored S Bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No. 6001 Whether custom macro
Page 430B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Resetting signal RST [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that the CNC is being reset. This signal is used for reset processing on the PMC. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following cases: 1. When the emergency
Page 4315. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 3017 Output time of reset signal RST [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 16 ms [Valid data range] 0 to 255 To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added is specified in this parameter. RST signal output time = time required for reset + parame
Page 432B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL APPEN- STATUS WHEN TURNING 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) DIX E POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR (B--63014EN) AND WHEN RESET OPERATOR’S MANUAL APPEN- STATUS WHEN TURNING (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) DIX E POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR
Page 4335. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 5.3 Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine TESTING A as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine PROGRAM actually or viewing the position dis
Page 434B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION All--axis machine lock check signal MMLK [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the all--axis machine lock signal. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: -- When all--axis machine lock sig
Page 4355. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S, T, and B commands) Machine lock applies only to move commands along controlled axes. Updating modal G codes or setting a coordinate system is performed normally. M, S, T, and B (2nd auxilialy fun
Page 436B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’
Page 4375. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Dry run signal DRN [Classification] Input signal [Function] Enables dry run. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the tool is moved at the feedrate specified for dry run. When this signal is set to 0, the tool is moved normally. CAUTION Wh
Page 438B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 RDR TDR [Data type] Bit TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84; rigid tapping) 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled 1410 Dry run rate [Data ty
Page 4395. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use parameter No. 1430 instead. Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.4 Dry run 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.4 Dry run (For Lathe) (B--63004EN)
Page 440B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Signal Single block signal SBK [Classification] Input signal [Function] Enables single block operation. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, single block operation is performed. When this signal is set to 0, normal operation is performed. Single
Page 4415. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Caution CAUTION 1 Operation in thread cutting When the SBK signal turns to “1” during thread cutting, operation stops after execution of the first non-thread cutting block after the thread cutting command. 2 Operation in canned cycle When the SBK signal turns
Page 442B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF General This function selects whether the movement of the tool with manual operation (such as jog feed and manual handle feed) is counted for calculating the current position in the workpiece coordinate system. A check signal is also
Page 4435. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 When manual absolute The manual move amount is not counted to the present position on the turns off (manual workpiece coordinate system. The present position display on the CRT absolute signal includes the manual move amount. The display is reset to the initia
Page 444B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Manual absolute check signal MABSM [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the manual absolute signal. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: -- When the manual absolute signal *ABSM is set
Page 4455. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP General When a slash followed by a number (/n, where n = 1 to 9) is specified at the head of a block, and optional block skip signals BDT1 to BDT9 are set to 1 during automatic operation, the information
Page 446B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 2. When BDTn is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a block containing /n, the block is not ignored. BDTn ”1” ”0” Reading by CNC → ...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 .... Not ignored 3. When BDTn, currently set to 1, is set to 0 while the CNC is reading a block con
Page 4475. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Optional block skip check signals MBDT1 MBDT2 to MBDT9 [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notify the PMC of the states of the optional block skip signals BDT1 to BDT9. Nine signals are provided, corresponding to the nine optional block s
Page 448B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.12.2 Program section configuration 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.12.2 Program section configuration (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.12.2 Progr
Page 4495. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 5.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP General During program execution, this function causes a single block stop right after a block with a specified sequence number is executed. To use this function, first specify the program number (1 to 9999) of a program
Page 450B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.7 PROGRAM RESTART General A program may be restarted at a block by specifying the sequence number of the block, after automatic operation is stopped because of a broken tool or for holidays. This function can also be used as a high--speed program check funct
Page 4515. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G006 SRN F002 SRNMV Parameter 7310 Movement sequence to program restart position Setting entry is accepted. [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1 to no. of controlled axes This parameter sets the axis sequence when t
Page 452B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Warning WARNING As a rule, the tool cannot be returned to a correct position under the following conditions. Special care must be taken in the following cases since none of them cause an alarm: Manual operation is performed when the manual absolute mode is OFF
Page 4535. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 5.8 TOOL RETRACTION AND RETURN General The tool can be retracted from a workpiece to replace the tool, if damaged during machining, or to check the status of machining. Then, the tool can be returned to restart machining efficiently. :Position in which the too
Page 454B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D In the manual mode, when it is necessary to replace the tool or measure workpieces, the tool can be moved manually, such as by manual continuous feed, or manual handle feed. This operation is called manual retraction. The path along which the tool retracts i
Page 4555. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Tool retraction signal TRESC [Classification] Input signal [Function] Tool retraction mode is selected. [Operation] When this signal is turned to 1, the control unit retracts the tool by a pre--programmed distance. Tool retraction mode signal TR
Page 456B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G059 TRRTN TRESC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F092 TRSPS TRACT Warning WARNING The retraction axes and retraction distances specified with G10.6 need to be changed in appropriate blocks depending on the figure to be machined.
Page 4575. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 5.9 EXACT STOP/ EXACT STOP MODE/ TAPPING MODE/ CUTTING MODE (M SERIES) General NC commands can be used to control a feedrate in continuous cutting feed blocks as described below. D Exact stop (G09) The tool is decelerated in a block specifying G09, and an in--
Page 458B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61) 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) Cutting Mode (G64) (B--63014EN) Tapping Mode (G63) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61) (For Machining Center) Cutting M
Page 4595. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 5.10 BALANCE CUT (2--PATH CONTROL FOR T SERIES) General When a thin workpiece is to be machined as shown in fig. 5.10, a precision machining can be achieved by machining each side of the workpiece with a tool simultaneously;this function can prevent the workpi
Page 460B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Caution CAUTION 1 If feed hold operation is performed during balance cutting using both tool posts, balance cut processing is not performed at restart time, it is performed when the next move command is specified for both tool posts. 2 Balance cutting is not p
Page 4615. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 5.11 DNC OPERATION General By starting automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT), it is possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while a program is being read in via the reader/puncher interface, or remote buffer. If the floppy cassette dire
Page 462B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G043 DNCI #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F003 MRMT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 ND3 Setting entry is accepted. [Data type] Bit ND3 In DNC operation, a program is: 0 : Read block by block. (A “DC3” code is output for ea
Page 4635. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.6 SCHEDULING FUNCTION 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.4 SCHEDULING FUNCTION (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.5 SCHEDULING FUNCTION (For Mac
Page 464B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.12 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN General If the tool movement along the axes is stopped by a feed hold during automatic operation, then restarted after manual intervention such as tool exchange, the tool moves back to the point of intervention before automa
Page 4655. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 5.13 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING (M SERIES) General When rigid tapping is stopped, either as a result of an emergency stop or a reset, the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be drawn out by using a PMC signal. This function automatically
Page 466B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION (4) Resume Once rigid tapping retraction has been stopped, it can be resumed by performing the same operation as that used for starting rigid tapping retraction. If rigid tapping retraction has been completed, however, the start operation does not restart rigi
Page 4675. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Time chart for stopping rigid tapping retraction Tapping retraction start signal RTNT Spindle enable signal ENB Rigid tapping signal RGTAP Spindle excitation Retract movement When tapping retract is stopped, spindle enable signal ENB is set to “0”, in the same
Page 468B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G062 RTNT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F066 RTPT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5200 DOV [Data type] Bit DOV For tool extraction during rigid tapping, override is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 5381 Override for rigid tapping
Page 4695. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--63003EN--1/02 Caution CAUTION 1 If rigid tapping is stopped as a result of an emergency stop, the position on the tapping axis (Z--axis) is maintained but the spindle position is lost. In such a case, therefore, the positional relationship between the spindle and tapping ax
Page 470B--63003EN--1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.2 Rigid tapping 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.8 Rigid tapping (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.2 Rigid tapping (For Machining Center)
Page 4716. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 452
Page 472B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.1 POSITIONING General The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse rate. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is programmed. In the incr
Page 4736. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address F. Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.1 POSITIONING (G00) 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.1 POSITIONING (G00) (For Lathe) (B--63004EN
Page 474B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION General Tools can move along a line A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate specified in F. The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It need not be specified for each block
Page 4756. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter 1411 Cutting feedrate when the power is turned on Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 -- 32767 6 -- 3
Page 476B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NOTE 1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in parameter No. 1422 is effective. 2 If the setting for each axis is 0,
Page 4776. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION General The command below can move a tool along a circular arc in the defined plane. “Clockwise”(G02) and “counterclockwise”(G03) on the XpYp plane (ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewed in the positi
Page 478B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K. In this case, one arc is less than 180_, and the other is more than 180_ are considered. For T series, a
Page 4796. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 (Example) (M series) For arc (1) (less than 180_) G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R50.0 F300.0 ; For arc (2) (greater than 180_) G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R--50.0 F300.0 ; (2) r=50mm End point (1) Start point r=50mm Y X When the option for specifying arc radius R with nine d
Page 480B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NOTE 1 Specifying an arc center with addresses I, K, and J When the distance from the arc start point to the arc center is specified with addresses I, K, and J, a P/S alarm (No. 5059) is issued if: Maximum value which can be specified < I 2 + K 2 Example:
Page 4816. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter 1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system NOTE When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte axis To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cutter compe
Page 482B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 3410 Tolerance of arc radius [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 When a circular interpolation command (G02, G03
Page 4836. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 For T series, the U, V and W axes (parallel with the basic axis) can be used with G--code system B and C. 2 If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the arc specified by address R takes precedence and the other are ignored. 3 If
Page 484B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.4 THREAD CUTTING 6.4.1 Thread Cutting General Tool movement can be synchronized with spindle rotation when cutting threads. The spindle speed is continuously read through the position coder attached to the spindle. Then, it is converted to a cutting feedr
Page 4856. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Thread cutting signal THRD [Function] This signal indicates that thread cutting is in progress. [Output condition] This signal turns to “1” in the following cases: S Thread cutting mode in progress S Thread cutting cycle for turning This sign
Page 486B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Checking the spindle speed arrival signal before starting threading #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3708 SAT SAR SAR [Data type] Bit SAR: The spindle speed arrival signal is: 0 : Not checked 1 : Checked SAT: Check of the spindle speed arrival signal at the start of
Page 4876. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Setting the FL feedrate for the thread cutting cycle 1627 FL rate of exponential acceleration /deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS -
Page 488B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Setting the finishing allowance for the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 5141 Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Page 4896. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Warning WARNING During threading, stopping feed without stopping the spindle is dangerous because the cutting depth will abruptly increase. Feed hold is, therefore, disabled during threading. If attempted during threading, feed stops in the same way as sing
Page 490B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.15 CONSTANT LEAD THREAD 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) CUTTING (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.8 CONSTANT LEAD THREAD (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) CUTTING II.4.9 VARIABLE LEAD THREAD CUTTING II.4.10 CON
Page 4916. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.4.2 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract (T series) General When the automatic operation stop signal *SP is set to 0 during threading in a threading cycle, the tool immediately retracts while performing chamfering, then returns to the start point of the
Page 492B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Caution CAUTION While the tool is retracting, automatic operation stop signal *SP is ignored. Note NOTE The chamfering distance for retraction is determined by the setting of parameter No. 5130. Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.1.2 Thr
Page 4936. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.5 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) General For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final positioning from one direction is available. Overrun distance Start position Start position Temporary stop End position An overrun and
Page 494B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 5440 Positioning direction and overrun distance in uni--directional positioning for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0
Page 4956. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION General Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular interpolation by circular commands. The command method is to simply add one or two move co
Page 496B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION When HFC is 0 No. 1430: Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis Since the cutting feedrate for the arc is clamped to the above parameter value, the feedrate along the linear axis is clamped to the smaller parameter value. Examp
Page 4976. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.7 INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General With the involute interpolation function, an involute curve can be machined. Cutter compensation C is also possible. The use of involute interpolation eliminates the need to use short lines or arcs to approximat
Page 498B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.8 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION General Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movement
Page 4996. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter 1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 -- 240000 6 -- 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/mi
Page 500B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Alarm and message No. Message Description 145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS The conditions are incorrect when the polar IN POLAR COORDINATE coordinate interpolation starts or it is can- INTERPOLATION celed. 1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1 was specified. 2) An
Page 5016. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.9 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION General The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is once internally converted to a distance of a linear axis along the outer surface so that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed wit
Page 502B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system [Data type] Byte axis To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cutter compensation C (for the M series), tool nose radius compensation (for the T series), etc., each control
Page 5036. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.7 Cylindrical Interpolation 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.6 Cylindrical Interpolation (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.6 Cylindrical I
Page 504B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.10 Polygonal turning means machining a polygonal figure by rotating the workpiece and tool at a certain ratio. POLYGONAL TURNING (T SERIES) Workpiece Workpiece Tool Fig. 6.10 (a) Polygonal turning By changing conditions which are rotation ratio of workpie
Page 5056. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.10.1 Polygonal Turning General One of the axes (servo axes) controlled by the CNC is assigned as a tool rotation axis. Either serial spindle or analog spindle can be used as a workpiece axis (spindle). Polygonal turning using a servo axis is detailed in t
Page 506B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION (With the above setting, the reference counter capacity is 36000.) Parameter No. 1820 = 2 (CMR) Parameter No. 1821 = 36000 (reference counter capacity) Parameter No. 2084 = 36 (DMR numerator) Parameter No. 2085 = 1000 (DMR denominator) For the other servo p
Page 5076. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 360 No. 1420 = 72000 (= 2000 × ) 10 Also specify other feedrates in 10 degrees/min units. D Commands from the NC program When the machine is not performing polygonal turning, the machining program can issue move commands to the polygon axis. Such commands c
Page 508B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7600 PLZ [Data type] Bit PLZ Synchronous axis using G28 command 0: Returns to the reference position in the same sequence as the manual reference position return. 1: Returns to the reference position by positioning at a rap
Page 5096. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 217 DUPLICATE G251 (COM- G51.2 (or G251) is further comman- MANDS) ded in the polygonal turning mode. Modify the program. 218 NOT FOUND P/Q COM- P or Q is not commanded in the MAND IN G251 G51.2 (or the G251) blo
Page 510B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.10.2 Polygonal Turning with Two Spindles General In the polygonal turning with two spindles, the first spindle is used as a workpiece rotation axis (master axis). The second spindle is used as a tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis). Spindle r
Page 5116. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 The G51.2 command is modal. Once specified, the P, Q, and R values stay unchanged until another G51.2 is issued to change them or polygon synchronized mode is released. The S command issued to the first spindle during polygon synchroniza- tion mode specifie
Page 512B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Each time the spindle speed command for the first spindle changes or P and Q are re--specified in a G51.2, the clamp speed is checked to determine whether to issue P/S alarm No. 5018. Note that a reset can clear the alarm with the speed clamped. (A rotation
Page 5136. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 G51. 2 P1 Q2 ; Step 10. Change the spindle speed for finishing S2000; (master axis at 2000 rpm and polygon syn- . chronization axis at 4000 rpm with a phase difference of 0). . [Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6.] Step 11. Polygonal turning (finishing 1) . [Repeat s
Page 514B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION CAUTION 1 DGN indicates the loop gain because this function requires that both spindles be controlled with the same loop gain. However, no alarm is issued even if the loop gain is different between the spindles. (For the serial spindle control unit, the par
Page 5156. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 #4 to #7 Causes for P/S alarm No. 218 When P/S alarm No. 218 occurs, the polygon synchronization mode is released, but the indication of its causes remains until the alarm is cleared by a reset. #0 The specified speed is too low during spindle--spindle po
Page 516B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Indication of values specified during the spindle--spindle polygon synchronization mode DGN 474 Rotation ratio for the master axis during the spindle--spindle polygon synchronization mode (P command value) This indication is the current rotation ratio (P co
Page 5176. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs the PMC that the system is in the polygon synchronization mode. [Output condition] The polygon synchronization mode command (G51.2) sets this sign
Page 518B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Spindle polygonal speed arrival signal PSAR [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs the PMC that the spindle has reached its constant--speed for polygon synchronization during polygonal turning with two spindles. [Output condition] During
Page 5196. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D PMC sequence When a G51.2 is issued to put the system in the polygon synchronization mode, the polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN becomes on. Set up a PMC sequence for the polygon synchronization mode by monitoring this signal with a PM
Page 520B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Sequence common to methods (A) and (B) Regardless of whether the method you use is (A) or (B), set up the PMC sequence as follows: D Do not use the SFR/SRV signal to switch the rotation direction of the first spindle. Instead, fix the energizing method of t
Page 5216. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7602 COF HST HSL HDR SNG MNG [Data type] Bit MNG The rotational direction of the master axis (first spindle) in the spindle--spindle polygon turning mode is: 0: Not reversed. 1: Reversed. SNG The rotational direction of the
Page 522B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION COF In spindle--spindle polygon turning mode, phase control is: 0: Used. 1: Not used. CAUTION When the use of phase control is not selected, the steady state is reached in a shorter time because phase synchronization control is not applied. Once steady rota
Page 5236. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 7621 Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] For polygon turning with two spindles: Set a value between 0 and 32767, but which does not exceed the maximum allow
Page 524B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Alarm and message Number Message Description 218 NOT FOUND P/Q COM- The G51.2 block does not contain P or Q, MAND IN G251 or a specified value is invalid. The causes of this alarm are detailed in DGN No. 471. (See below.) DGN No. 471#7 NPQ  When P and Q ar
Page 5256. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 To the contrary to P/S alarm No. 221, P/S alarm No. 194 occurs if another NC control spindle function is specified during the two--spindle polygon synchronization mode. Caution CAUTION 1 The maximum spindle speed for each gear stage (No. 3741 to 3744) must
Page 526B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION CAUTION 6 During polygon synchronization mode, speed change and phase adjustment are performed each time the spindle speed is changed. Therefore, this mode cannot be used together with a function that causes continuous spindle speed change (such as G96 cons
Page 5276. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.11 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES) General When a tool with a rotation axis (C--axis) is moved in the XY plane during cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that the C--axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig
Page 528B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION [Data type] Bit axis [Valid data range] ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis ROSx ROTx Description 0 0 Linear axis ⋅ Inch/metric conversion is done. ⋅ All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Not rounded in 0 to 360_) ⋅ Stored pitch error compensa
Page 5296. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 5482 Limit value that ignores the rotation insertion of normal direction control axis [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 The rotation block of a n
Page 530B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 -- 240000 6 -- 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 -- 960
Page 5316. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.12 EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of a workpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore, exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation with respect to a
Page 532B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 5643 Amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential interpolation [Data type] 2--word type [Valid data range] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to
Page 5336. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.13 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the program command. D For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as at corners, machining is performed exactly as specifi
Page 534B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.12 Smooth interpolation 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) 515
Page 5356. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.14 HYPONENTIAL AXIS INTERPOLATION General In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is enable. When one of the circular interpolation axes is set to a h
Page 536B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.15 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B (M SERIES) General Helical interpolation B moves the tool helically. This interpolation can be executed by specifying the circular interpolation command together with up to four additional axes in simple high--precision contour
Page 5376. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6.16 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired increment (decrement) for the radius per revoluti
Page 538B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Parameter 3471 Allowable difference between the specified end point and that calculated from the increment (or decrement) and number of revolutions, for spiral or conical interpolation [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C
Page 5396. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN An invalid command has been speci- SPIRAL fied for spiral or conical interpolation. The most likely causes are as follows: 1) L = 0 specified 2) Q = 0 specified 3) R/, R/, C specified 4) H
Page 540B--63003EN--1/02 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.17 NURBS INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General Many computer--aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal dies for automobiles and airplanes utilize non--uniform rational B--spline (NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies. This f
Page 5416. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NURBS interpolation must be specified in high--precision contour control mode (between G05 P10000 and G05 P0). The CNC executes NURBS interpolation while smoothly accelerating or decelerating the movement so that the acceleration on each axis will not excee
Page 5427. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL 523
Page 5437. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7.1 The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions are available: FEEDRATE CONTROL 1. Rapid traverse When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid traverse r
Page 5447. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE 1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The manual rapid traverse also includes the r
Page 5457. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 -- 240000 30 --
Page 5467. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp General A common upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axis with parameter No. 1422. If an actual cutting feedrate (with an override applied) exceeds a specified upper limit, i
Page 5477. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 -- 240000 6 -- 100
Page 5487. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting Feed 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting Feed (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting
Page 5497. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Format For M series G94; G code for feed per minute (Group 05) F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min) For T series G98; G code for feed per minute (Group 05) F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min) Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 14
Page 5507. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE 1 When FCD = 1: If the block containing a G command (G98, G99) does not include an F command, the last F command specified is assumed to be specified in the G command mode of the block. Example 1: N1 G99 ; N2 Faaaa G98 ;
Page 5517. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/ Manual Feed Per Revolution General D Feed per revolution After specifying G95 (G99 for T series) (in the feed per revolution mode), the amount of feed of the tool per spindle revolution is to be dir
Page 5527. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1423 Feedrate in jog feed for each axis [Data type] Word axis When JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is set to 1 (feed per revolution) in T series, specify a feedrate in jog feed (feed per revolution) with an override of 100%
Page 5537. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7.1.5 F1-digit Feed (M series) General When a one--digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate set for that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. When F0 is specified, the rapid traverse rate is a
Page 5547. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameter 1450 Change of feedrate for one graduation on the manual pulse generator during F1 digit feed [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 127 Set the constant that determines the change in feedrate as the manual pulse
Page 5557. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1460 Upper limit of feedrate for the F1--digit feed command (F1 to F4) 1461 Upper limit of feedrate for the F1-digit feed command (F5 to F9) [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data
Page 5567. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.6 Feedrate Inverse Time Specification (M series) General Feedrate of the tool can be specified by the move distance of the block and inverse time (FRN). D Linear interpolation 1 Speed Speed: mm/min (metric input) (G01) FR
Page 5577. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7.1.7 Override 7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override General An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421). Also, 1% rapid traverse override select
Page 5587. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Signal Rapid traverse override signal ROV1,ROV2 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals override the rapid traverse rate [Operation] These code signals correspond to the rates as follows: Rapid tra
Page 5597. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are inverted signals. To set an override value of 1%, set signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 to 1111110, which corresponds to a binary code of 0000001. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G014 ROV2 ROV1 G096
Page 5607. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.3 Rapid traverse override 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.3 Rapid traverse override (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR
Page 5617. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Feedrate Override signal *FV0 to *FV7 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals override the cutting feedrate. Eight binary code signals correspond to override values as follows: 7 Override value =
Page 5627. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting feed 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting feed (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting
Page 5637. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0 7.1.7.4 Override cancel General The override cancel signal fixes the feedrate override to 100%. Signal Override cancel signal OVC
Page 5647. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.8 Automatic Corner Override (M series) General D Inner corner automatic When G62 is specified, and the tool path with cutter compensation override applied forms an inner corner, the feedrate is automatically overridden at
Page 5657. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Override value An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value is valid even for dry run and F1--digit feed specification. In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows: F ⌠ (inner corne
Page 5667. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL In circular cutting with an inward offset, the actual feedrate for a specified feedrate (F) becomes as follows: Rc: Radius of the path of the cutter’s center F × Rc Rp: Programmed radius Rp As the actual feedrate becomes the
Page 5677. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1713 Distance Le from the starting point in inner corner automatic override [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Input in mm 1 0.1 0.01 mm Input in inches 0.1 0.01 0.001 inch [Valid data ran
Page 5687. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.9 External Deceleration General These signals decelerate the feedrate of the control axes down to the speed which has been set by parameter No. 1426 and 1427. Signal External deceleration signal *+ED1 to *+ED8 *--ED
Page 5697. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1005 EDMx EDPx [Data type] Bit axis EDPx External deceleration signal in the positive direction for each axis 0 : Valid only for rapid traverse 1 : Valid for rapid traverse and cutting feed E
Page 5707. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.10 Feed Stop Function General During axis motion, the feed stop function checks a position deviation amount at all times. When the amount exceeds the “feed stop position deviation amount” set by the parameter (No. 1832),
Page 5717. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7.1.11 Feedrate Clamping by Arc Radius (M series) General When an arc is cut at a high speed in circular interpolation, a radial error exists between the actual tool path and the programmed arc. An approximation of this error
Page 5727. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL When a given arc radius R and the maximum permissible speed V for that arc radius are set as parameters, the maximum permissible speed v for an arc with a programmed radius r can be obtained from expression 3. Then, if a spec
Page 5737. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Expressions 1, 2, and 4 are approximate expressions. This means that, as the arc radius becomes smaller, the approximate precision lowers. Therefore, even when the feedrate is clamped to the maximum permissible speed v obtain
Page 5747. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.12 Automatic Corner Deceleration (M series) General This function automatically controls the feedrate during corner machining according to the angle of a corner made by machining blocks or according to the feedrate differ
Page 5757. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 ⋅ When linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feed is enabled If the angle made by blocks A and B is smaller than that specified in parameter No. 1740 (for the selected plane), and if the feedrates
Page 5767. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Block A (G01) Block B (G01) ° ° Block A (G02) Block B(G01) Angle made by two lines If a circular path is included, the angle between the tangent of the arc and another line is considered. 1741 Feedrate for assuming the termin
Page 5777. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Caution CAUTION 1 The angle of the machining tool path is compared with that specified in parameter No. 1740 only for the selected plane. The actual feedrate and that specified in parameter No. 1741 are compared only for the
Page 5787. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL ⋅ When linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feed is enabled If the difference between the feedrates of blocks A and B for each axis exceeds the value specified in parameter No. 1780, the feedrate
Page 5797. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ; N2 N2 Y100. ; N1 Tool path if corner deceleration is not applied ⌠ Tool path when corner deceleration was applied Speed F1000 Feedrate Without corner deceleration along With corner deceleration X axis
Page 5807. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL D Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1601 ACD [Data type] Bit ACD Function for automatically reducing the feedrate at corners (automatic corner deceleration function) 0 : The function is not used. 1 : The function is used. #7
Page 5817. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1781 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference--based automatic corner deceleration function (for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system
Page 5827. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.4.3 Automatic corner deceleration 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) 7.1.13 Advanced Preview Control (M series) General This function is designed for high--speed
Page 5837. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter 1431 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the advanced preview control mode [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---C Millime
Page 5847. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE 1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in parameter No. 1431 is effective. 2 If
Page 5857. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1762 Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting feed in the advanced preview control mode [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] 1 ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Set an exponential acceleration/deceleratio
Page 5867. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1770 Parameter 1 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in the advanced preview control mode (maximum machining speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Page 5877. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 CAUTION 1 When 0 is set in parameter No. 1770 or parameter No. 1771, linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled. 2 In parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771, set values that satisfy the following: Parameter No. 1
Page 5887. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1780 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference based corner deceleration function (for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of
Page 5897. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the control described above is not exercised. 2 Use type--B linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (by setting bit 0 (FWB) of parameter No. 1602 to 1). Parameters for adv
Page 5907. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Note NOTE In the advanced preview control mode, the functions listed below cannot be specified. To specify these functions, cancel the advanced preview control mode, specify the desired function, then set advanced preview con
Page 5917. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7.1.14 High--precision Contour Control by RISC (M series) General Some machining errors are due to the CNC. Such errors include machining errors caused by acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. To eliminate these erro
Page 5927. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Name Function Absolute/incremental com- Combined use possible in the block mand Sequence number 5 digits Tape code EIA, ISO Tape format Word address format Control in/out Yes Optional block skip Yes Circle radius R specificat
Page 5937. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 G18 : Plane selection (ZpXp plane) where, Yp is the Y--axis or its parallel axis; G19 : Plane selection (YpZp plane) where, Zp is the Z--axis or its parallel axis. G38 : Cutter compensation C with vector held G39 : Cutter com
Page 5947. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.14.1 When feed per minute is specified, this function reads several tens of Look-- ahead blocks ahead to perform acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, that is, to apply acceleration/deceleration to the specified
Page 5957. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Example of deceleration To ensure that the feedrate specified for a block is reached when the block is executed, deceleration is started in the previous block. Feedrate Specified feedrate Feedrate after accel- F3 P1 eration/d
Page 5967. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Look-- ahead bell--shaped To use this function, set bit 7 (BDO) and bit 1 (NBL) of parameter No. acceleration/deceleration 8402 to 1, and also set the following parameters: before interpolation Parameter No. 8400: Parameter 1
Page 5977. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D When maximum acceleration is not reached Acceleration + Time -- Feedrate Time Acceleration The tool is accelerated to a specified feedrate, starting at the beginning of a block. The tool can be accelerated over multiple blo
Page 5987. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Feedrate clamping based When the distance required to decelerate the tool from a specified feedrate on the total travel of the is less than the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance, the tool in look-- ahead
Page 5997. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D At the end of acceleration Feedrate control by look--ahead bell-- shaped acceleration/ Feedrate deceleration before interpolation Specified feedrate Clamp feedrate Total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance at t
Page 6007. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL When the feed hold When the feed hold function is used during acceleration, control is function is used during performed as described below. acceleration D While applying constant or increasing acceleration Starting at the po
Page 6017. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Feedrate command and If an F command is changed by, for example, another F command, the deceleration corner deceleration function, or the automatic feedrate determination function, look--ahead bell--shaped acceleration/decele
Page 6027. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Single block function When the single block function is specified while look--ahead while look--ahead bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used, bell--shaped control is performed as described below.
Page 6037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 While the tool is not (1) A ≦ Remaining travel for the tool in the block being executed when being accelerated or the single block function is specified decelerated when the The tool is gradually decelerated so that the feedr
Page 6047. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL How the tool is stopped The tool is decelerated (or accelerated) over multiple blocks until the when decelerated over feedrate becomes 0. multiple blocks Feedrate Single block function specified Time CAUTION 1 Depending on th
Page 6057. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Caution CAUTION 1 When the specification of the dry run function or feedrate override function is changed, the acceleration/deceleration curve must be recalculated while the tool is actually moving along an axis. For this rea
Page 6067. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.14.2 This function reads several tens of blocks ahead to exercise automatic Automatic feedrate feedrate control. control function A feedrate is determined on the basis of the conditions listed below. If a specified feedra
Page 6077. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Feedrate control In automatic feedrate control mode, the feedrate for the tool is controlled conditions as described below. - The feedrate required at a corner is calculated from the specified feedrate difference at the corne
Page 6087. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Suppose that the specified feedrate for the tool is 1,000 mm/min, and that the direction of tool movement changes by 90 degrees (from along the X--axis to along the Y--axis). Suppose also that an allowable feedrate difference
Page 6097. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Example of feedrate As shown below, when a curve is formed by very short successive line determination based on segments, there is no significant feedrate difference along each axis at acceleration along each each corner. Con
Page 6107. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL N8 N7 N9 N6 N5 Y N1 X N4 N3 N2 Feedrate along the X--axis Feedrate along the Y--axis Feedrate along the tangent to the path N1 N5 N9 N1 N5 N9 591
Page 6117. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Feedrate determination When a block specifies circular feed per minute and bit 3 (CIR) of based on an allowable parameter No. 8475 is set to 1, the feedrate of the tool is automatically acceleration during determined so that
Page 6127. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Example of feedrate This function can be used when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is set determination based on to 1. cutting load Cutting the workpiece with the end of the cutter (Fig. 7.1.14.2 (b)) incurs a greater resis
Page 6137. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Z XY plane 30 deg 90 Area 1 deg 60 Area 4 deg 45 deg Area 3 Area 2 CAUTION The feedrate determination function that is based on cutting load uses an NC command to determine the direction of movement along the Z--axis. This me
Page 6147. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Automatic speed control Involute interpolation automatic speed control overrides a specified in involute interpolation feedrate automatically, in the following two ways, during involute interpolation to obtain a high--quality
Page 6157. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 (2) Override near the basic circle Near the basic circuit, the change in curvature of an involute curve is relatively large. If such areas are cut at a programmed feedrate, a heavy load may be placed on the cutter, preventing
Page 6167. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.14.3 Signal HPCC mode signal MHPCC (F066#6) [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates that the system is set to high--precision contour control mode (HPCC mode). [Output condition] The signal is set to 1 if G05
Page 6177. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7.1.14.4 Parameter Parameters of linear accel- eration and deceleration before interpolation 8400 Parameter 1 for determining a linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Valid
Page 6187. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8402 BDO DST BLK NBL [Data type] Bit BDO, NBL Set the type of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. BDO NBL Meaning 0 0 Acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation is of lin- ear type 1
Page 6197. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 8416 The time required to the maximum acceleration in advanced preview bell-- shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] mec [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets
Page 6207. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameters of automatic feedrate control 8410 Allowable velocity difference in velocity determination considering the velocity difference at corners [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit
Page 6217. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 8456 Area--2 override [Data type] Word [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 100 (Standard setting: 80) This parameter specifies an override in area 2 of velocity calculation considering the cutting load. 8457 Area--3 over
Page 6227. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 8465 maximum allowable feedrate for automatic feedrate control [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---B IS ---C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 10 -- 2400
Page 6237. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8475 CIR BIP [Data type] Bit CIR The function of automatic feedrate control considering acceleration and deceleration during circular interpolation is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. When 1 is set, parameter
Page 6247. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1768 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed in HPCC mode [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 8 to 512 NOTE The function for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpo
Page 6257. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 5616 Override value at the start of override 2 near the basic circle 5617 Override value at the start of override 3 near the basic circle 5618 Override value at the start of override 4 near the basic circle 5619 Override valu
Page 6267. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL LM2 In HPCC mode, a stroke check before movement for the second stored stroke limit is: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. SG0 When G00 is specified in HPCC mode: 0 : The setting of bit 1 (MSU) of parameter No. 8403 is followe
Page 6277. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8485 CDS INV PRW G02 G81 G51 [Data type] Bit G51 In high--precision contour control (HPCC) mode, the scaling/coordinate system rotation functions are: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. G81 In high--precision
Page 6287. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.14.6 Note D Acceleration/deceleratio n before interpolation in look--ahead blocks NOTE If there is a series of very short blocks, for each of which the rate of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is low, the ac
Page 6297. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Notes on positioning When executing a G00 command when bit 7 of parameter No. 8403 (SG0) (G00) is set to 1, note the following: WARNING Linear interpolation positioning is performed. CAUTION 1 The G00 command is replaced with
Page 6307. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.15 Positioning by Optimul Acceleration General When a rapid traverse command is specified during automatic operation, the function for positioning by optimul acceleration can be used to adjust the rapid traverse rate, tim
Page 6317. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Rapid traverse When rapid traverse bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration is used, T1 in bell--shaped the figure below and the rapid traverse rate are adjusted. T2 is not acceleration/deceleration adjusted. Rapid traverse rat
Page 6327. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6131 OAD [Data type] Bit axis OAD The function for positioning by optimul acceleration is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 6141 Distance D1 for level 1 (metric input, or rotation axis) 6142 Distan
Page 6337. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 The settings must satisfy the relationship D1 < D2 < D3 < D4 < D5 < D6. 2 Up to seven levels can be used for adjustment. When using four levels, for example, set D4 to 99999999. 3 For diameter programming axes, set a d
Page 6347. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 6181 Level 1 servo loop gain 6182 Level 2 servo loop gain 6183 Level 3 servo loop gain 6184 Level 4 servo loop gain 6185 Level 5 servo loop gain 6186 Level 6 servo loop gain 6187 Level 7 servo loop gain [Data type] Word axis
Page 6357. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 In AI contour control mode, the following functions are effective: (1) Look--ahead linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (look--ahead control of up to 40 blocks) (2) Automatic corner deceleration (3) Feedrate
Page 6367. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Name Description Exponential interpolation × (G02.3, G03.3) Dwell (G04) f (For a specified number of seconds or revo- lutions) To specify a number of revolutions for the dwell, the thread cutting/synchronous feed function mus
Page 6377. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Feed functions f : Can be programmed × : Cannot be programmed Name Description Rapid traverse rate Up to 240 m/min (0.01 mm) Up to 100 m/min (0.0001 mm) Rapid traverse rate override F0, 25, 50, 100 % Rapid traverse rate overr
Page 6387. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Others f : Can be programmed × : Cannot be programmed Name Description Cycle start/Feed hold f Dry run f Single block f Interlock f Machine lock f When an axis machine lock signal (MLK1 to MLK8) is turned on or off, accelerat
Page 6397. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Conditions for entering Before G05.1 Q1, the following modal codes must be specified. If this AI contour control mode condition is not satisfied, P/S alarm No. 5111 will be issued. G code Description G00 Positioning G01 Linea
Page 6407. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Advanced preview linear For a cutting feed command in feed per minute mode, advanced preview acceleration/deceleration control of up to 15 blocks can be performed, and linear before interpolation acceleration/deceleration can
Page 6417. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 (Example of acceleration) To execute a block at a specified feedrate, the feedrate is increased. Feedrate Specified feedrate F3 Feedrate resulting from acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation F2 F1 Time N1 N2 Automati
Page 6427. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ; N2 Y100. ; N2 Tool path when tool movement is not decelerated at the corner Tool path when tool movement is decelerated at the corner Feedrate on the X--axis N1 Feedrate When deceleration is not perfo
Page 6437. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Feedrate clamping by When a curve is made up of a series of short straight lines as shown in the acceleration figure below, the difference in feedrate on each axis at each corner is not large. Therefore, deceleration by feedr
Page 6447. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL N1 N2 N3 N1 N2 N3 Feedrate clamping by This function can suppress acceleration in an arc machining block to an arc radius allowable level by clamping the feedrate. Based on the arc radius R and the maximum allowable feedrate
Page 6457. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Rapid traverse In rapid traverse, acceleration/deceleration is performed using linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, and tool movement is performed by positioning based on linear interpolation. The tool movem
Page 6467. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F062 AICC Parameter D Parameters related to linear acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation 1770 Maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpol
Page 6477. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Feedrate (mm/min) Parameter 1770 Parameter 1771 Time (ms) 1784 Speed when an overtravel alarm is issued during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment s
Page 6487. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL F : Maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter 1770) T : Time required to reach the maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolati
Page 6497. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Feedrate (mm/min) Allowable acceleration Parameter 1432 Parameter 1785 Time (ms) D Parameters related to feedrate clamping by arc radius 1731 Arc radius for the upper limit imposed on feedrate [Data type] 2--word [Unit of dat
Page 6507. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1732 Lower limit RVmin for feedrate clamping by arc radius [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS--A, IS--B IS--C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 8 to 15000 0 to 12000
Page 6517. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7052 NMI [Data type] Bit axis For the PMC--controlled axes and Cs axis, set 1. D Parameter numbers in (Parameters related to linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) standard mode, Parame
Page 6527. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL (Other parameters) Parameter Parameter No. Standard Advanced AI contour mode preview control control Precision of radius error in cir- PCIR1/3403#0 None cular interpolation Maximum cutting feedrate 1422 1431 1422 (for all axe
Page 6537. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Caution CAUTION 1 When the total distance for the blocks under advanced preview control is equal to or less than the deceleration distance from the current feedrate, deceleration starts. When advanced preview control has proc
Page 6547. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.17 High--speed Linear Interpolation (M series) General The high--speed linear interpolation function processes a move command related to a controlled axis not by ordinary linear interpolation but by high--speed linear int
Page 6557. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 D Interpolation period In high--speed linear interpolation mode, the NC interpolation period can be changed. As the interpolation period decreases, the machining speed and precision increase. IT2, IT1, and IT0 bits (bits 6, 5
Page 6567. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7501 IT2 IT1 IT0 [Data type] Bit IT2 IT1 IT0 0 0 0 : The interpolation period in high--speed linear interpolation mode is 8 ms. 0 1 0 : The interpolation period in high--speed linear interpol
Page 6577. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7.2 ACCELERATION/ DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/ Deceleration General D Automatic acceleration/ To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automatically deceleration applied when the tool
Page 6587. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Cutting feed: Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is set by parameter 1622) Jog feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is set by parameter 1624) Rate after interpolation
Page 6597. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE This parameter is effective only when the function of bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed is provided. If the function is not provided, the setting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No. 1
Page 6607. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Except
Page 6617. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1626 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for each axis [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/dec
Page 6627. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Example Fh: Rapid traverse feedrate X--axis feedrate ∼: Setting of parameter No. 1722 (feedrate reduction ratio) Fd: Feedrate where deceleration is terminated: = Fh∼/ 100 N1 G00 X- - ; N2 G00 X- - ; When the function of over
Page 6637. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 This function is enabled when the time constants for rapid traverse bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration T1 and T2 are specified in parameter Nos. 1620 and 1621, respectively.
Page 6647. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL D When the function is provided, set this parameter to time constant T1 used in bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse, and set parameter No. 1621 to time constant T2. D When the function is not provided, sp
Page 6657. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/ Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation General If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is enabled (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, CTL), acceleration/deceleratio
Page 6667. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is an optional function. This function is enabled when the CTL bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610) is specified. If bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration after
Page 6677. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1624 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis. [Data type] Word axi
Page 6687. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Note If the optional function for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is not provided, exponential acceleration/deceleration is always selected, irrespective of the setting. NOTE 1 If linear
Page 6697. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 7.2.4 Bell--Shaped Acceleration/ Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation General The bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation provides smooth acceleration and deceleration to reduce stress
Page 6707. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1610 JGLx CTBx CTLx [Data type] Bit axis CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run 0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied. 1 : Linear acceleration
Page 6717. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1622 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, linear acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation or bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, in cutting feed for each axis [Data type] Word
Page 6727. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Note NOTE 1 If bell--shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation during cutting feed is enabled, bell--shaped acceleration/ deceleration is executed during cutting feed and during a dry run. Bell--shaped acceleration
Page 6737. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 The function of linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in- creases or decreases the feedrate specified in the tangential direction. If the feedrate command is changed D Type A Acceleration/deceleration is start
Page 6747. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Deceleration is performed when the following condition is satisfied: Distance needed to reduce the cur- Distance to stored stroke limit 1 rent feedrate (tangential feedrate) for each axis < to that specified in parameter No.
Page 6757. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Feedrate Parameter 1: Parameter No. 1630 Parameter 1 Parameter 2: Parameter No. 1631 Time Parameter 2 NOTE 1 When 0 is set in parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631, linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
Page 6767. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1784 Feedrate when overtravel alarm has generated during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS ---A, IS ---B IS ---
Page 6777. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 If a block without a move command is found during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the movement is decelerated and temporarily stopped in the previous block. 2 If a one--shot G code is specified dur
Page 6787. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.6 Corner Control 7.2.6.1 In--position check General Whether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range is checked. If the in--position check function is enabled, the CNC checks the position during deceler
Page 6797. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Signal address . #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1601 NCI [Data type] Bit NCI Inposition check at deceleration 0 : Performed 1 : Not performed 1826 In--po
Page 6807. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.6.2 In--position check independently of feed/rapid traverse General If separate in--position check for cutting feed and rapid traverse is executed, a small in--position check range can be specified between those cutting f
Page 6817. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 1826 In--position width for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 The in--position width is set for each axis. When the deviation of the machine position from the specifie
Page 6827. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B--63003EN--1/02 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.6.3 Error detect (T series) General Generally, the CNC does not zero the feedrate at the interface of two blocks during cutting feed. Because of this, a corner of a tool path may be rounded. This part causes the corner of
Page 6837. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE If the error detect signal is on, a cutting block is not executed until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous cutting block has been completed. This function alone cannot prevent corner rounding due to delay
Page 684B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8 AUXILIARY FUNCTION 665
Page 6858. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 8.1 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION General D Miscellaneous Function When a numeral of up to 8 digits is specified following address M, code (M code) signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals to turn on or
Page 686B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 3. It is possible to change over the scale factor of B output 1000 or 10000 when the decimal point input is omitted in the inch input system, using the parameter AUX (No.3405#0). When DPI=1. Command Output value When AUX is 1: B1 10000 When AUX is 0: B1 1000 Ba
Page 6878. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 (6) If the completion signal remains set to 1 for longer than period TFIN, specified in parameter No. 3011 (standard value: 16 msec), the CNC sets the strobe signal to 0 and reports that the completion signal has been received. (7) When the strobe signal is set
Page 688B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 2b.Execution of a miscellaneous function after move command completion (1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)(7)(8) (9) M command Mxx Move command Code signals M00--M31 (*2) Strobe signal MF PMC side action End signal FIN Distribution end signals DEN TMF TFIN Signal Miscellane
Page 6898. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Decode M signals DM00 , DM01 , DM02 , DM30 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals report particular miscellaneous functions are specified. The miscellaneous functions in a command program correspond to output si
Page 690B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Tool function code signals T00 to T31 Tool function strobe signal TF [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals report that tool functions have been specified. [Output condition] For the output conditions and procedure, see th
Page 6918. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Distribution end signal DEN [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals report that all commands (such as move commands and dwell) are completed except those miscellaneous functions, spindle--speed functions, 2nd auxilialy functions tool fu
Page 692B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G004 FIN #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F001 DEN F007 BF BF TF SF MF F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30 F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00 F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08 F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27
Page 6938. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 M, S, T, B code MF, SF, TF, BF, signal Delay time Fig. 8.1 (a) Delay time of the strobe signal NOTE The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight. Example : When 30 is set, 32 ms is
Page 694B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code 3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code 3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code 3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 8 Set the allowable numbers of d
Page 6958. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3405 AUX [Data type] Bit AUX The least increment of the command of the second miscellaneous function specified with a decimal point 0 : Assumed to be 0.001 1 : Depending on the input increment. (For input in mm, 0.001 is assumed, or for
Page 696B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameter Nos. 3421 and 3422, 3433 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429 and 3430, or 3431 and 3432, buffering for the next block is not performed u
Page 6978. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 When a move command and miscellaneous function are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways: i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and miscellaneous function commands. ii) Executing miscellaneou
Page 698B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.11.1 Miscellaneous function (M code) 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) II.11.4 2nd Auxiliary function (B code) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.11.1 Miscellaneous function (M code) (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) II.1
Page 6998. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 8.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK General Inhibits execution of a specified M, S, T and B function. That is, code signals and strobe signals are not issued. This function is used to check a program. Signal Auxiliary function lock signal AFL [Classification]
Page 700B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Auxiliary function lock check signal MAFL [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal reports the state of the auxiliary function lock signal AFL. [Output condition] This signal turns to “1” when: · The auxiliary function lock signal AFL is “
Page 7018. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 8.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK General So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However, this function allows up to three M codes to be contained in one block. Up to three M codes specified in a block are simultaneously output to t
Page 702B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION M command (MaaMbbMcc;) Code signal M00-M31 Strobe signal MF Code signal M200-M215 Strobe signal MF2 Code signal M300-M315 Strobe signal MF3 PMC side operation End signal FIN TMF TFIN Signal 2nd, 3rd M function code signal M200 to M215 M300 to M315
Page 7038. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3404 M3B [Data type] Bit M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block 0 : One 1 : Up to three Caution CAUTION 1 M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be specified together with another M code. 2 Some M
Page 704B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.11.2 Multiple M commands in a single 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) block (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.11.2 Multiple M commands in a single (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) block Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUA
Page 7058. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 8.4 HIGH--SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE General To accelerate M/S/T/B function execution, the high--speed M/S/T/B interface has simplified the transfer of the strobe and completion signals of the M/S/T/B functions. Whether to use the usual system or high--speed syste
Page 706B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Next block Code signal Mxx Myy Strobe signal MF PMC side operation Miscellaneous function completion signal MFIN Fig. 8.4 (a) Timing chart of the high--speed system Next block Code signal Mxx Myy Strobe signal MF PMC side operation Completion signal FIN Fig. 8.
Page 7078. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Miscellaneous function completion signal MFIN [Classification] Input signal [Function] Reports that the execution of a miscellaneous function using the high-- speed M/S/T/B interface is completed. [Operation] For the operation and aprocedure of
Page 708B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 2nd, 3rd M function completion signals MFIN2, MFIN3 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Indicate that when the high--speed interface is used for multiple M com- mands per block, the second to 3rd M functions have been completed. [Operation] Se
Page 7098. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3001 MHI MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, and B codes 0 : Normal 1 : High--speed Note NOTE 1 The strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF are “0” when the power is turned on. 2 When the control unit is re
Page 710B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8.5 WAITING M CODE (TWO--PATH CONTROL) General Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the other during machining. By specifying an M code in a machining program for each path, the two paths can wait for each other at a specified block. W
Page 7118. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G063 NOWT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F063 WATO #1 Parameter 8110 Waiting M code range (minimum value) [Data type] Two--word [Valid data range] 0 and 100 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the minimum value of the waiting M
Page 712B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8.6 M CODE GROUP CHECK FUNCTION General This function checks whether combinations of M codes (up to three) specified in one block are correct. The function has two purposes. One of the purposes is to alarm if an M code which must not be combined with any other
Page 7138. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 For M codes which must be used separately from other M codes, always set their group number to “1”. Such M codes include M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99. For M codes for which the CNC performs internal processing in addition to sending them to the machine, als
Page 714B--63003EN--1/02 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION (iii) No. 3441 = 234, No. 3442 = 345, No. 3443 = 456, No. 3444 = 567 In this case, item numbers 100 to 199 correspond to M234 to M333, 200 to 299 correspond to M345 to M444, 300 to 399 correspond to M456 to M555, and 400 to 499 correspond to M567 to M666. The g
Page 7158. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Now pressing the [READ] key displays the soft keys shown in Fig. 8.6 (d). > MDI **** *** *** 00 : 00 : 00 CANCEL EXEC Fig. 8.6 (d) To execute the read operation, just press the [EXEC] key. D Output Pressing the [PUNCH] key on the screen shown in Fig. 8.6 (c) di
Page 716B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 697
Page 7179. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) General When up to five digits are specified after address S, code and strobe signals are sent out and used to control the spindle speed. The code signals are retained until another S code is issued. One S code is
Page 718B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT General There are two types of spindle motor control interfaces, spindle serial output and spindle analog output. The spindle serial output interface can control two serial spindles. The spindle analog output
Page 7199. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions. f=Available ⌠=Unavailable Serial spindle Analog spindle Spindle Function When used as the When used as the First serial Second serial first spindle (with third spindle spindle spindl
Page 720B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE 1 The multispindle function is necessary. The function cannot be used for the first and second spindles simultaneously. 2 The multispindle function can control the speed of three spindles and switch the feedback signal between two position coders. It a
Page 7219. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal · Spindle control unit signals for the serial spindle (input), (output) for the first serial spindle (input), (output) for the second serial spindle These addresses are on the CN
Page 722B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter D Connection of serial spindle control unit #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3701 SS2 ISI [Data type] Bit ISI Specifieds whether the serial spindle interface is used. 0 : Used 1 : Not used NOTE 1 This parameter is enabled only when the serial spindle inter
Page 7239. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 749 S--SPINDLE LSI ERROR A communication error occurred for the serial spindle. The cause may be noises, discon- nection of an optical cable or the interruption of the power to the spindle amplifier. (Note) Unlik
Page 724B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS SCREEN D Information on spindle control #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 400 SAI SS2 SSR POS SIC SIC 0: No module is available for spindle serial output. 1: A module for spindle serial output is available. POS 0: No module is available for spindle analog o
Page 7259. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D Load and speed meter readings for the serial spindle 410 First serial spindle: Load meter reading (%) 411 First serial spindle: Speed meter reading (rpm) 412 Second serial spindle: Load meter reading (%) 413 Second serial spindle: Speed meter reading (rpm
Page 726B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.3 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL General This section describes spindle speed control. It also explains the position coder and the spindle speed arrival signal (SAR). 707
Page 7279. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Command flow of The following chart summarizes spindle speed control. spindle speed control CNC PMC and machine Machining program, etc.  Gear select signal output Output to the PMC S command (M series) (to change the machine gear). (GR3O, GR2O, GR1O) S
Page 728B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D S command The S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machining programs, etc. for the CNC. For constant surface speed control (during G96 mode), the CNC converts the specified surface speed to the spindle speed. In the M series with bit 4 (GTT
Page 7299. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D Processing for gear Although the S command contains the spindle speed, the object that is changing actually controlled is the spindle motor. Therefore, the CNC must have some provision to detect the gear stage between the speed and spindle motor. There ar
Page 730B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The speed commands output to the spindle motor are as follows: For the serial spindle, the speed commands are processed as values 0 to 16383 between the CNC and spindle control unit. For the analog spindle, the speed commands are output to the analog voltag
Page 7319. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE If a specified voltage of 10 V is already higher than the acceptable input voltage for the spindle drive system, calculate the spindle speed that corresponds to 10 V using a proportional calculation method and use it instead. Now, in response to the sp
Page 732B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle motor speed command (analog voltage output) 10V VC VH GR30 VL GR10 GR20 Spindle speed command A B C (S code input) Vmin Vmaxl Vmaxh Vmax A A B C 4095 4095 4095 4095 VC: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor. V
Page 7339. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 · Spindle speed A (Parameter No.3741) (rpm) with low-speed gears when the command voltage is 10V · Spindle speed B (Parameter No.3742) (rpm) with high-speed gears when the command voltage is 10V (medium-speed gear for 3-stage) · Spindle speed C (Parameter N
Page 734B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D When Gear select signal change S code read To next block Gear select signal TM GR3O F /GR2O /GR1O SF FIN TMF TFIN Spindle speed command VH VL 0V Fig. 9.3 (e) Time chart when gear select signal changes In this case, the gear select signal is output; after
Page 7359. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 In addition, for the speed command output to the spindle motor, analog voltages 0 to 10 V for analog spindle control correspond to digital data 0 to 16383 for serial spindle control. However, it might be easier if you consider them code signals from 0 to 40
Page 736B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Reference Block Diagram for Analog Voltage Output With the constant surface speed control option equipped. CNC Power magnetics cabinet [Surface speed] M code Gear change command S(m/min) Spindle speed X--axis pres- command ent value Constant r S (rpm) surf
Page 7379. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Keep in mind the following: Even with bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 1, the CNC cannot determine the output polarity if it has not issued M03/M04, and therefore, actual output does not work even if the speed command output has been specified. D Command
Page 738B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Control unit max+10V SVC SVC Spindle speed 2mA analog voltage Name Connector/Pin ES Output ES output SVC JA40/7 impedance 100ζ ES JA40/5 ENB1 ENB Enable signal ENB1 JA40/8 ENB2 ENB2 JA40/9 WARNING Since the output voltage is a weak signal, do not relay it t
Page 7399. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Spindle stop signal *SSTP [Classification] Input signal [Function] The command output to the spindle is held. [Operation] When the spindle stop signal turns to “0” , the output voltage becomes 0V and the enable signal ENB turns to “0” (M05 is
Page 740B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION low gear range, the gear select signal does not change and the command output is calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high gear. When the spindle motor speed is set by parameter GST (No. 3705#1)=1, the command output is output regardless of gear
Page 7419. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Spindle speed arrival signal SAR [Classification] Input signal [Function] The SAR signal initiates cutting feed. In other words, if the signal is logical 0, cutting feed will not start. [Operation] Generally, this signal is used to inform the CNC t
Page 742B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle enable signal ENB [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs absence or presence of spindle output command. [Output condition] The ENB signal becomes logical 0 when the command output to the spindle becomes logical 0. Otherwise, the
Page 7439. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 S12-- bit code signal R01O to R12O [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by the CNC to code signals 0 to 4095. [Output condition] The relationship between the spindle spe
Page 744B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G027 CON *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1 G028 GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP SOR SAR G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I #7 #6 #5 #4
Page 7459. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 GST: The SOR signal is used for: 0 : Spindle orientation 1 : Gear shift SGB: Gear switching method 0 : Method A (Parameters No. 3741 to 3743 for the maximum spindle speed at each gear are used for gear selection.) 1 : Method B (Parameters No. 3751 and 3752
Page 746B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE 1 Type M: The gear selection signal is not entered. In response to an S command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speed range of each gear specified beforehand in parameters. Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputting the gear se
Page 7479. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 [Adjustment method] (1) Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter. (2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage (10 V). (3) Measure the output voltage. (4) Assign the value obtained by the following e
Page 748B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION [Valid data range] 0 to 20000 Set the spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during gear shift. When GST, #1 of parameter 3705, is set to 0, set the spindle speed during spindle orientation in rpm. When GST, #1 of parameter 3705
Page 7499. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 3740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival signal [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 225 Set the time elapsed from the execution of the S function up to the checking of the spindle speed arrival signal. 3741 Maxi
Page 750B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3751 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 3752 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 3 [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 4095 For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gears are switched. S
Page 7519. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 3761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping 3762 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of parameter 37
Page 752B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3772 Maximum spindle speed [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed of the spindle is specified , or the speed of the spind
Page 7539. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Caution CAUTION This section mentioned a spindle speed control that should be prepared on the CNC side. But it is also necessary to design the signals to the spindle control unit. Consult the manual of the spindle control unit used and take necessary action
Page 754B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.4 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL FOR TWO--PATH LATHE General In a two--path lathe application, the additional path section (path No. 2) can have the same spindle interface as a one--path lathe (see Section 9.2.). Each spindle is controlled by a command issued by t
Page 7559. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D Position coder feedback When an analog spindle is used, supplying the position coder feedback signal (Analog) signal to the position coder interface of tool post 2 via an external distribution circuit makes it possible to use either tool post for thread c
Page 756B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Two--spindle control The spindle interface for either tool post is used. D Selection of spindle The spindle command select signals SLSPA and SLSPB command (input) specify the tool post whose spindle command is to be followed by each spindl
Page 7579. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D Position coder feedback If either tool post uses an analog spindle as the first spindle, the spindle signal (when an analog feedback signals SLPCA and SLPCB (input) spindle is used) cannot cause the NC to select a position coder feedback s
Page 758B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 2nd and 3rd spindles If the first spindle is a serial spindle, the second and third spindles can also be used in a two--path lathe application. (See Section 9.2.) In the following chart, all spindles are connected under two--spindle control. Under one--spin
Page 7599. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Options related to Optional functions for spindles are valid for both tool posts. However, spindles you may want to use the optional functions for only one of the tool posts because of relationships with the interface and PMC ladder. Parameters are availabl
Page 760B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (2) In the 2-spindle control mode Signal input Command to the Command to the spindle connected to spindle connected to SLPCA SLPCB tool post 1 tool post 2 0 0 Spindle command of Spindle command of tool post 1 tool post 2 0 1 Spindle command of Spindle comma
Page 7619. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE The SLPCA and SLPCB signals are effective only in the 2-spindle control mode using two serial spindles. In the 2-spindle control mode using analog spindles, the feedback signal of spindle 1 is input to tool post 1, and the feedback signal of spindle 2
Page 762B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3702 ECS ESS EAS ESI EMS [Data type] Bit EMS Multi--spindle control function 0 : Used 1 : Not used NOTE If the multi--spindle control function is not required for one tool post in two--path control, specify this parameter f
Page 7639. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3703 2SP [Data type] Bit 2SP Specifies whether one or two spindles are controlled (T series 2--path control). 0 : One spindle (two tool posts) 1 : Two spindle (two tool posts) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 PCS [Data type] Bit PCS When
Page 764B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Table 9.4 lists the position coder feedback signals used for each tool post in the above configuration. These position coder feedback signals are selected according to the following: Bit 3 (PCS) of parameter No. 3706 Spindle feedback select signals SLPCA
Page 7659. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 The spindle commands include S code commands, maximum speed command (G50S__), M03, M04, M05, and constant surface speed control commands (G96 and G97) 2 Signals to operate the spindle control unit are not affected by the spindle command select s
Page 766B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.5 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL General With the spindle serial output or analog output function, specifying the surface speed (m/min or feet/min) directly in an S command makes it possible to change the spindle output continuously so as to maintain a co
Page 7679. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Example of Spindle Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed Analog Output with the output 10 V is 1000 rpm for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000 rpm for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds to the parameter No. 3741, 3742
Page 768B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle Serial Output The output to the spindle in spindle serial output is a digital data. Therefore assume the following relation for calculation: Spindle analog output (voltage) 10V = Spindle serial output (digital data) 4095. The above calculation becom
Page 7699. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Z N3 N4 X In this program, block N2 issues a constant surface speed control command (G96), a surface speed command (S12 m/min), and a feed--per--revolution command (G95). Block N3 causes the CNC to change the spindle speed specification from 76.4 rpm to 191
Page 770B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1405 FPR [Data type] Bit FPR Specifies whether to use a function that converts the specified spindle rotation speed to the actual spindle rotation speed in feed--per--revolution mode, that is, the feed--per--revolution func
Page 7719. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control mode (G96). The spindle speed in constant surface s
Page 772B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Caution CAUTION 1 If the spindle speed corresponding to the calculated surface speed exceeds the speed specified in the spindle speed clamp command (G50S_ for T series and G92S_ for M series) during the G96 mode, the actual spindle speed is clamped at the v
Page 7739. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.6 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION General With this function, an overheat alarm (No. 704) is raised and the spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindle speed deviates from the specified speed due to machine conditi
Page 774B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 1. When an alarm is issued after a specified spindle speed is reached Spindle speed Sr Sd Sq Specified Sq Sd speed Sr Actual speed Check No check Check Time Specification of Start of check Alarm another speed 2. When an alarm is issued before a specified sp
Page 7759. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the actual spindle speed is not within a tolerance to the specified speed. [Output condition] The signal becomes logical “1”
Page 776B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 4911 Ratio (q) of the fluctuation of spindle speed which is assumed to be the specified spindle speed [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Unit of data 1% 0. 1% (T series) Data range 1 -- 100 1 -- 1000 [Valid data range] NOTE Unit of data depends on parameter No
Page 7779. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 704 OVER HEAT : SPINDLE Spindle overheat in the spindle fluc- tuation detection (1) If the cutting load is heavy, relieve the cutting condition. (2) Check whether the cutting tool is share. (3) Another possible c
Page 778B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.7 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES) General The PMC can read actual spindle speed. Signal Actual spindle speed signal AR0 to AR15 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These 16-bit binary code signals output from the CNC to the PMC t
Page 7799. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.8 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) General This function positions the spindle using the spindle motor and position coder. The function has a coarser least command increment compared with the Cs contour control function and has no interpolation capability w
Page 780B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Selecting a spindle Any axis in the control axis group can be used as the C axis (parameter positioning axis no. 1020). Specify −1 as its servo axis number (parameter no. 1023). Only one set of this setting can be used for each control path. The spindle sub
Page 7819. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Command system The command system comes in two types: The first positions a semi-fixed angle; the second positions an optional angle. D Semi-fixed angle A 2-digit numerical value following the M address is used for the positioning by M code command. There a
Page 782B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION G code system A G code system B, C Command method Command of Command of Address used Address used A!B on the A!B on the and G--code above Fig. above Fig. Direct the end point position by Absolute the distance from C C180.0 ; G90,C G90C180.0 ; command the pr
Page 7839. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Spindle clamp signal SCLP [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal specifies that the spindle be clamped mechanically in a spindle positioning sequence. When this signal turns to 1, clamp the spindle on the machine (apply the brakes or
Page 784B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle orientation completion signal ZPx [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the spindle orientation for the spindle positioning has been completed. [Output condition] When spindle orientation is complete, this signal
Page 7859. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Sequence (Time chart) - Spindle Orientation M code MF SPSTP POSITION LOOP INITIALIZE Spindle enable on SUCLP *SUCPF Spindle movement ZPx SCLP Spindle enable off *SCPF FIN POSITION LOOP INITIALIZE is performed within the CNC. Spindle ENABLE ON/OFF specifies
Page 786B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - Spindle Positioning by M code M code MF SPSTP Spindle enable on SUCLP *SUCPF Spindle movement SCLP Spindle enable off *SCPF FIN 767
Page 7879. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 - Spindle Positioning by Address C,H SPSTP Spindle enable ON SUCLP *SUPCF Spindle movement SCLP Spindle enable OFF *SCPF - Spindle Positioning Reset M code MF SPSTP POSITION CODER INITIALIZE SUCLP *SUPCF FIN POSITION CODER INITIALIZE is performed only in th
Page 788B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ZMIx [Data type] Bit axis ZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initial backlash at power--on 0 : Positive direction 1 : Negative direction NOTE When the serial spindle is being used, thi
Page 7899. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 0 : Not set automatically 1 : Set automatically 1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed [Data type] Two--word axis Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be used
Page 790B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 1620 Time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Set time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration for each axis. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
Page 7919. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis. 1850 Grid shift for each axis [Data
Page 792B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE The direction for spindle orientation (or reference position return) in spindle positioning using a serial spindle is determined by this parameter. 4044 Velocity loop proportion gain in servo mode (High gear) 4045 Velocity loop proportion gain in servo
Page 7939. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE Set the gear ration between spindle and AC spindle motor when the spindle positioning is performed with serial spindle. For which gear is used, it depends on the clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH1B. 4065 Position gain in servo mode (HIGH)
Page 794B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION ESI Selection of a spindle positioning specification 0 : The conventional specificaion is used. 1 : The extended specificaion is used. NOTE The extended specification includes the following two extensions: D With the conventional specification, the number o
Page 7959. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 4960 M code specifying the spindle orientation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Integer [Valid data range] 6 to 97 Set an M code to change the spindle rotating mode to the spindle positioning mode. Setting the M code performs the spindle orientation. Spindle
Page 796B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE ° represents the basic angular diplacement set in pamrameter No. 4963. 4963 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] deg [Valid data range] 1 to 60 This parameter sets a basic angular displacement used for half-
Page 7979. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 4971 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 1 4972 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 2 4973 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 3 4974 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 4 [Data type] Word Set the
Page 798B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Alarm and message Number Message Description 053 TOO MANY ADDRESS In the chamfering and corner R com- COMMANDS mands, two or more of I, K and R are specified. Otherwise, the character af- ter a comma(”,”) is not C or R in direct drawing dimensions programmi
Page 7999. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Caution CAUTION 1 Feed hold is invalid during spindle positioning. 2 Spindle positioning stops when emergency stop is applied; restart with orientation operation. 3 Dry run, machine lock, and auxiliary function lock are not available during spindle position
Page 800B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.9 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL General The Cs contour control function positions the serial spindle using the spindle motor in conjunction with a dedicated detector mounted on the spindle. This function can perform more accurate positioning than the spindle positio
Page 8019. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Command Address The address for the move command in Cs contour control is the axis name specified in parameter no.1020. This address is arbitrary. When the second auxiliary function option is provided, address B cannot be used for the name of the contour ax
Page 802B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Reference Position After the serial spindle is switched from spindle speed control to Cs Return of Cs Contour contour control mode, the current position is undefined. Return the Control Axis spindle to the reference position. The reference position return o
Page 8039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 - Interruption of reference position return (i) Manual operation Return to the reference position can be interrupted by reset- ting, emergency stop, or turning off the feed axis and direction select signal. When the interrupted return operation is re- sumed
Page 804B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle contour control change completion signal FSCSL [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates the axis is under Cs contour control. [Output condition] Spindle speed control mode 0 Cs contour control mode 1 Time Chart Sp
Page 8059. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Clutch/Gear signal Refer to the manual of serial spindle. (Serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH2A These signals determine what parameter (loop gain, etc.) to be used for each gear position. CTH1A and CTH2A are the gear select signals for the serial spind
Page 806B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Signals on manual Feed axis and direction select signal +Jn, −Jn (Input) operation Manual handle feed axis select signal HSnA, HSnB, HSnC, HSnD (Input) (Refer to respective items in this manual) The Cs contour control axis can be m
Page 8079. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 1020 Name of the axis used for programming for each axis [Data type] Byte axis Set the name of the program axis for each control axis, with one of the values listed in the following table: Axis Set Axis Set Axis Set Axis Set name value name value name value
Page 808B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis [Data type] Byte axis Set the servo axis for each control axis. Generally, the same number shall be assigned to the control axis and the corresponding servo axis. Set --1 as the number of servo axis to the Cs cont
Page 8099. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 1820 Command multiply for each axis (CMR) [Data type] Byte axis D When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27 1 Set value= +100 [Valid data range: 102 to 127] (Command multiply) D When command multiply is 0.5 to 48 Set value = 2 × command multiply [Valid data rang
Page 810B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3900 The number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 8 Set the number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis (1st group) NOTE Set 0 when there is no servo axis that inter
Page 8119. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 3911 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis during interpolation (High gear) 3912 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis during interpolation (Medium high gear) 3913 Loop gain of the se
Page 812B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3930 Number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 8 Set the number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis (4th group) NOTE When there is no servo axis or less than four servo a
Page 8139. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 3941 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis during interpolation (High gear) 3942 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis during interpolation (Medium high gear) 3943 Loop gain of the se
Page 814B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE For which position gain is used in actual spindle operation, it depends on clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH2A. 4135 Grid shift value at Cs contour control [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] 1 pulse unit (360000 p/rev) [Valid data range]
Page 8159. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Warning WARNING In the spindle contour control mode, do not switch the spindle gears. When the gears need to be changed put the system in the spindle speed control mode first. Note NOTE In the T series machines, the spindle contour control function and the
Page 816B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.10 MULTI--SPINDLE CONTROL General In addition to the conventional (first) spindle, two other (second and third) spindles can be controlled. These additional spindles allow two-stage gear changes. An S code is used for a command to any of these spindles; w
Page 8179. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Basic control (Common An S command is sent as a speed command to each spindle selected, using to TYPE-A and TYPE-B) a spindle selection signal (SWS1 to SWS3 ). Each spindle rotates at the specified speed. If a spindle is not sent a spindle select
Page 818B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The concept of Type B multi-spindle control outlined below. SIND SWS 1 * SSTP 1 Hold 1 First spindle SIND2 SWS 2 * SSTP 2 S command Hold 2 Second spindle SIND3 SWS 3 * SSTP 3 Hold 3 Third spindle Spindles to be controlled In multi-spindle control, the first
Page 8199. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Relationship with other optional functions D Constant surface speed The control function for keeping the surface speed constant can be used control with any of the three spindles if the spindle speed is within the range allowable for this function. (When th
Page 820B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Signal Spindle Selection Signal SWS1, SWS2, SWS3 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Controls whether S command specified to the NC is output to the spindle or not in multi-spindle. SWS1 1 : Outputs a speed command to the first spindle
Page 8219. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 2nd position coder selection signal PC2SLC [Classification] Input signal [Function] Position coder selection signal used for control. PC2SLC 1 : Uses feedback pulses obtained by the second position coder for control. 0 : Uses feedback pulses obtain
Page 822B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G027 *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1 G028 PC2SLC GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP GR31 GR21 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I G034 R08I2 R07I2 R06I2 R05I2 R04I2 R03I2 R02I2 R01I2
Page 8239. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 PCS GTT [Data type] Bit PCS When multi--spindle control is applied to two tool posts in two--path control, this parameter specifies whether a position coder feedback signal from the other tool post is selectable, regardless of t
Page 824B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3707 P22 P21 P22, P21 Gear ratio of spindle to second position coder Magnification P22 P21 ×1 0 0 Number of spindle revolutions ×2 0 1 Magnification= ×4 1 0 Number of position coder revolutions ×8 1 1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3709 MSI
Page 8259. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 When the constant surface speed control option is selected, the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is specified. 2 When the multi--spindle control option is selected, set the maximum speed fo
Page 826B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3811 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 of the second spindle 3812 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 of the second spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the maximum spindle speed for each gear of the second spindle. NOTE
Page 8279. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 3822 Maximum speed of the third spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum speed for the third spindle. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindle speed is specified, or the
Page 828B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Warning WARNING Do not switch between the first and second position coders while a function that uses position coder feedback information is being executed. That is, PMC signal PC2SLC cannot be used while, for instance, a command for feed per rotat
Page 8299. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11 RIGID TAPPING 9.11.1 In a tapping cycle (M series: G84/G74, T series: G84/G88), synchronous control is applied to the tapping operation of a tapping axis and the General operation of the spindle. This capability eliminates the need to use a tool such a
Page 830B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The descriptions given in this section (such as spindle gear switching and M--type/T--type) are based on the explanation given in Section 9.3. Refer to Section 9.3 as necessary. Specification of The differences in the specifications for rigid tapping for th
Page 8319. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11.2 As shown in the figure below a gear can be inserted between the spindle Connection Among and spindle motor, and between the spindle and position coder. Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder Spindle control Error Spindle amplifier Spindle motor c
Page 832B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The M series allows up to three stages, regardless of which gear selection method has been selected. (Parameter Nos. 5224 and 5234 cannot be used.) The T series supports up to four stages. (Set parameter Nos. 5221 to 5224 and 5231 to 5234.) When the multi--
Page 8339. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 S Gear ratio is 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, If the gear ratio is either 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8, it is set using parameters 1:8 (VGR=0) PG1 and PG2 (No. 3706 #0, #1). This applies if the position coder is mounted in a spindle or built into a spindle motor when only one s
Page 834B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Changing gears during rigid tapping requires a different process from that for gear changes during normal machining. As described above, changing gears conforms to the gear change specifications mentioned in section 9.3 when the M type gear selection method
Page 8359. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE This table show an example of three gears. For the basic spindle motor speed, refer to the spindle motor description manual. “+ a” means that the spindle motor speed may slightly exceed the basic spindle motor speed. If the M type gear selection method
Page 836B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.11.3 Rigid Tapping Specification D Feed rate In rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F; the spindle speed is S×360(deg/min). Override is invalid for both of them. An override of up to 200% can be applied to withdrawal operati
Page 8379. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11.4 For rigid tapping adjustment, the diagnosis screen displays information Display Data on the related to rigid tapping. Diagnosis Screen For part of the display data, the user can choose between two sets of data items relating to the synchronization of
Page 838B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Diagnosis No. 0452 is cleared to “0” when rigid tapping mode is set or canceled, and diagnosis No. 0453 is cleared to “0” in the positioning of the rigid tapping cycle. The following figure shows the tapping axis as the Z axis. Z--axis error Zc Ze Speed 1 1
Page 8399. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Diagnosis screen D Spindle position deviation 0450 SPINDLE MOTION ERROR Spindle position deviation during rigid tapping [Unit] Pulse D Number of pulses distributed to the spindle 0451 SPINDLE MOTION PULSE Number of pulses distributed to the spindle during r
Page 840B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Spindle--converted move command difference during rigid tapping (momentary value) 0455 SYNC. PULSE(SUM) Momentary spindle--converted move during command difference between the spindle and the tapping axis during rigid tapping [Unit] Pulse NOTE This data i
Page 8419. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11.5 Command Format Command format for the The rigid tapping command format for the T series is described below. T series For an explanation of the command format used with the M series, refer to Section II.13.2.2 of the “Operator’s Manual for Machining C
Page 842B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Specifying M29 and G84 (G88) in the same block (Note, however, that M29 and Mjj for C--axis clamping cannot be specified in the same block.) GjjX (Z) __Z (X) __R__P__F__K__M29****; X (Z) __C__; Rigid X (Z) __C__; tapping · mode · G80; D Converting G84 (G8
Page 8439. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 G84 G85 ( Tapping cycle) G84 (G88) (G98 mode) G84 (G88) (G99 mode) Spindle Spindle stop stop Initial point Motion 1 Motion 2 Motion 6 Spindle CW R point Spindle CW R point Spindle Spindle stop stop Motion 3 Motion 5 Spindle CCW Spindle CCW Z (X) point Z(X)p
Page 844B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Rigid tapping in feed per Rigid tapping is classified into two types: rigid tapping in feed per rotation mode rotation mode (G99) and rigid tapping in feed per minute mode (G98). Example) The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per rotation mode f
Page 8459. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11.6 Signal 9.11.6.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function Rigid tapping signal RGTAP [Classification] Input signal [Function] When M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) is specified, the PMC enters rigid tapping mode, th
Page 846B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Rigid tapping in-- progress signal RTAP [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies the PMC that rigid tapping mode is set. RTAP 1 : Rigid tapping mode is currently set. 0 : Rigid tapping mode is not currently set. By latching M29
Page 8479. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 M series: SF output depends on the gear selection method, as described below. [1] M--type gear selection method SF output depends on bit 6 (SFA) of parameter No. 3705. [2] T--type gear selection method SF output depends on the setting of bit 5 (NSF) of para
Page 848B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION GR3O GR2O GR1O 1st (low) speed gear   f 2nd (medium) speed gear  f  3rd (high) speed gear f   Gear selection signals (input) GR2, GR1 [Classification] Input signal [Operation] When T--type gear selection is being used, these signals are us
Page 8499. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11.6.4 Signals related to second spindle rigid tapping Gear selection signal See the description of the signals related to gear switching, given above. (input) GR21 Signals related to multi--spindle control Spindle selection signals SWS1, SWS2
Page 850B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION When bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1, to select a spindle to be used for rigid tapping, set the signals as indicated below. Signal state Spindle used for rigid tapping RGTSP1 RGTSP2 First spindle “1” “1” First spindle “1” “0” Second spindle “0
Page 8519. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 However, the display of the actual speed is switched by this signal, even during rigid tapping. 9.11.6.5 Signal addresses #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G027 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS2 SWS1 G028 PC2SLC GR2 GR1 G029 GR21 G061 RGTSP2 RGTSP1 RGTAP #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F00
Page 852B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION T--type gear selection When T--type gear selection is used, the PMC must determine whether method gear switching is to be performed, and subsequently perform gear switching as required. For this purpose, each time a spindle--speed function code is specified
Page 8539. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D When T--type gear The spindle--speed function strobe signal SF and selection is used spindle--speed function code signals S00 to S31 are output to the PMC. (However, parameter setting is required to enable output of the S codes and
Page 854B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.11.7 The timing chart for rigid tapping specification depends on the method Timing Charts for Rigid used to specify rigid tapping mode, the gear selection method (M--type or T--type), and whether to perform gear switching. Tapping Specification From the t
Page 8559. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11.7.1 When M29 is specified before G84 (G74) M type gear selection method M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position
Page 856B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle *Gear output change motion SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart show an example wh
Page 8579. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 T type gear selection method M29 RTAP First bllock Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position loop Fig. 9.11.7.1 (c) Gear change is n
Page 858B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle *Gear output change motion SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an ex
Page 8599. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11.7.2 M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block M type gear selection M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Posi
Page 860B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has sh
Page 8619. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 T type gear selection method M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position loop Fig. 9.11.7.2 (c) When gear change
Page 862B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle outpout SF S code out- put GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an example where the g
Page 8639. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11.7.3 Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters M type gear selection M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally. ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more
Page 864B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally. ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an
Page 8659. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 T type gear selection method M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally. ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle outoput SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position loop Fig.
Page 866B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First blcok Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally ENB To be masked to the second blcok Spindle output SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart sho
Page 8679. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11.7.4 When rigid tapping is completed, the mode is canceled if a G code (such Timing to cancel rigid as G80, canned cycle G code, or Group 01 G code) is issued. The spindle output is produced in the same way as executing S0. Cancel tapping mode the PMC r
Page 868B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION WARNING 1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code, such as G00 or G01, the block containing the G code is executed at the same time the ENB signal is turned to “0”. Therefore, if a block contains an M code for controlling the spindle, an erro
Page 8699. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.11.8 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3705 EVS ESF SFA NSF SGT ESF [Data type] Bit ESF When the spindle control function (S analog outpu or S serial output) is used, and the consatant surface speed control function is used or bit 7 (GTT) of parameter No.
Page 870B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 PG2 PG1 GTT PG2 PG1 [Data type] Bit PG2, PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder Magnific PG2 PG1 ation ×1 0 0 Magnification = ×2 0 1 Number of spindle revolutions ×4 1 0 Number of position coder revolutions ×8 1 1 GTT Selec
Page 8719. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Spindle motor speed Max. output (4095, 10V) Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No. 3736) Spindle motor min. clamp speed (Parameter No. 3735) Spindle speed command Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed (S command) at gear1 at gear2 at gear3 parameter param
Page 872B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5200 SRS FHD DOV SIG CRG VGR G84 FHD PCP DOV SIG CRG VGR G84 [Data type] Bit G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping 0 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the issue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See pa
Page 8739. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5201 TDR TDR NIZ [Data type] Bit NIZ Smoothing in rigid tapping is: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping 0 : Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameter Nos. 5261 through 526
Page 874B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5204 DGN NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit DGN On the diagnosis screen: 0 : A rigid tapping synchronization error is displayed. (Nos. 455 to 457) 1 : An error
Page 8759. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE If the setting of this parameter is 0, the M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is determined by the setting of parameter 5210. Otherwise, it is determined by the setting of parameter 5212. The setting of parameter 5212 must always be within the ab
Page 876B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 5221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (First gear) 5222 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Second gear) 5223 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Third gear) 5224 Number of gear teeth on
Page 8779. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (First gear) 5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Second gear) 5243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Third gear) 5244 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Fourth gear) [Data type] Two--word [Unit
Page 878B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 5271 Acceleration/deceleration time constant during extraction in rigid tapping (First gear) 5272 Acceleration/deceleration time constant during extraction in rigid tapping (Second gear) 5273 Acceleration/deceleration time constant during extraction in rigi
Page 8799. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 5281 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (First gear) 5282 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (Second gear) 5283 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
Page 880B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Example) When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows: SPINDLE MOTOR E = 1.667 (V) Position (A motor speed of 6000 rpm corresponds to 10 Spindle coder V.) L = 360 (One rotation of the spin
Page 8819. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 CAUTION The broad in--position width deteriorates the screw precision. 5310 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter sets t
Page 882B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Example) When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows: SPINDLE S = 3600 MOTOR G = 3000 Position Spindle coder L = 360_ (One spindle rotation per spindle motor rotaion) α = La / 4096 = 720_/
Page 8839. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Parameter No. 5310 usually sets the limit of positional deviation during movement along the tapping axis for rigid tapping. To specify a setting exceeding the valid range specified in parameter No. 5310 according to the reso
Page 884B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.11.9 Alarm and Message Number Message Description 200 ILLEGAL S CODE COM- In the rigid tapping, an S value is out of MAND the range or is not specified. The maximum value for S which can be specified in rigid tapping is set in pa- rameter (No.5241 to 5243
Page 8859. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Number Message Description 740 RIGID TAP ALARM; EX- Position deviation value of spindle at CESS ERROR move exceeded a set value during rigid tapping. 741 RIGID TAP ALARM; EX- Position deviation value of spindle at CESS ERROR move exceeded a set value during
Page 886B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.11.10 Notes NOTES ON SPINDLES CAUTION 1 When using an analog spindle, set the spindle speed offset value parameter (No. 3731) accurately. For the standard system, a value within --8191 to 8191 must be specified in this parameter. To perform rigid tapping,
Page 8879. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Notes on using functions such as the CAUTION spindle positioning 1 When the spindle orientation function is to be used at the function at the same same time time The spindle orientation function positions the spindle by using sensors and the PMC, without be
Page 888B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION CAUTION (3)Although the system can change to rigid tapping mode directly from Cs contouring contorl mode, positions designated in Cs contouring control mode are not preserved if riged tapping mode is canceled by G80. When the system is changed to rigid tapp
Page 8899. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 4044 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 1, gear 2) 4045 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 3, gear 4) [Unit of data] [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set a proportional gain for the velocity loop in a servo mode
Page 890B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION CTH1 CTH2 Gear selected Parameter No. to be used 0 0 HIGH 4065 4044 4052 0 1 MEDIUM HIGH 4066 1 0 MEDIUM LOW 4067 4045 4053 1 1 LOW 4068 9.11.11 Reference Item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.2 RIGID TAPPING 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014
Page 8919. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.12 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL General This function enables the synchronous control of two spindles. It also enables the control of the rotation phase of a spindle, allowing non--standard workpieces as well as rods to be held by either of the two spindle
Page 892B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Constant surface speed control can be executed in synchronization control even while a workpiece is being held with the two spindles. However, if the speed is to change in excess of the specified time constant, the speed changes within the extent specifie
Page 8939. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D A spindle--phase synchronous control command is effective only in synchronous spindle control mode. The specified phase can be repeatedly changed under synchronous control. Signal See the manual of serial spindles. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 4800 N
Page 894B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Alarm and message Number Message Description 194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A contour control mode, spindle positioning SYNCHRO--MODE (Cs--axis control) mode, or rigid tapping mode was specified during the serial spindle synchronous control mode. Correct the pro- g
Page 8959. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 9.13 SPINDLE ORIENTATION General This function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle can be stopped in either of the following two ways. · The spindle is mechanically stopped by using stoppers. · The spindle is stopped by applying a functio
Page 896B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 360 n = ×  (2i Pi) 4096 i=0 where Pi = 0 when SHAi = 0 Pi = 1 when SHAi = 1 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08 G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00 G081 S
Page 8979. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Caution CAUTION 1 To perform spindle orientation by using the spindle control unit, the signals of the spindle control unit must be used. To perform serial spindle orientation by using a position coder (to perform serial spindle orientation with the stop po
Page 898B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.14 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING General Spindle output switching switches between the two windings, one for low speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the special spindle motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates stable output ch
Page 8999. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D When gear selection output signals, GR2O and GR1O , are used (for machining centers in which constant surface speed control is not provided and GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set to 0) Set two gears, which are almost the same. (Example:
Page 900B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.15 THREE--SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT General Serial spindle can be connected three in this three--spindle serial control. The third serial spindle operates as an ordinary third analog spindle. For the third as well as the first and second serial spindles, all
Page 9019. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D The serial spindles are connected as follows: JA7B Spindle control First SPDL--1/JA41 unit for the first spindle JA7A serial spindle Mother board JA7B Spindle control Second unit for the second spindle serial spindle JA7B Spindle control Third unit for th
Page 902B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions. (This table relates to a table that appears in Section 9.2.) f = Available × = Unavailable Spindle Serial spindle Analog spindle First Second Third First spindle Third spindle Functi
Page 9039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 The multi--spindle function can control the speed of the three spindles and switch the feedback signal between two position coders. It can operate without the second or third spindle. When the multi--spindle function is used with the M series, the co
Page 904B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Motor speed detection See Section 2.11 for details. for the third spindle DSP3 (n = setting in parameter No. 1891) D Abnormal load detection See Section 2.10 for details. for the third spindle ABTSP3 Signal address D Spindle contro
Page 9059. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter D Connection of serial spindle control unit #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3701 SS3 SS2 ISI NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit type ISI Specifies whether to use the fi
Page 906B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter setting Serial spindles to be used SS3 SS2 ¢ ¢ First serial spindle only ¢ f First and second serial spindles f f First, second, and third spindles D Parameters of serial No. 4000 -- 4351: S1 For 1st serieal spindle spindle control unit S2 For
Page 9079. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Contents 749 S--SPINDLE LSI ERROR A communication error occurred for the serial spindle. The cause may be the disconnection of an optical cable or the interruption of the power to the spindle amplifier. (Note) Unlike alarm N
Page 908B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Diagnosis screen D Information relating to third serial spindle control #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 430 SS3 SSR SIC SIC 0 : The module required for the three--spindle serial output function is not installed. 1 : The module required for the three--spindle serial
Page 9099. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D Information related to the activation of the spindle serial output interface for the third serial spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 439 SPE S3E SHE SHE 1 : Abnormal operation in serial spindle communication module on the mother board of the CNC S3E 1 : Abno
Page 910B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.16 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL General In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the second spindle can be controlled as a slave axis of the first spindle. Thus, control based on the Cs contour axis control function, rigid tapping function, and s
Page 9119. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D Operation in each 1. Spindle mode (ordinary spindle control) control mode The second spindle rotates upon the issue of the same command as that used for the first spindle. The command does not specify the speed of the spindle, instead specifying the ratio
Page 912B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Parking function In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the parking function stops the motion of the first or second spindle, regardless of the mode (spindle mode, spindle positioning mode, Cs contour axis control mode, or rigid tapping mode) of the
Page 9139. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 When the parking function is activated for a spindle in a mode featuring a position loop, such as Cs contour axis control mode, spindle positioning mode, and rigid tapping mode, the spindle is stopped at the point where the parking function is activa
Page 914B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Simple spindle Simple spindle synchronous control does not guarantee synchronous synchronization and spindle operation. However, in a control mode featuring a position loop, phase error monitor such as Cs contour axis control mode, rigid tapping mode, and
Page 9159. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D Relationship between When the spindle synchronous control option is selected, ensure that simple spindle simple spindle synchronous control signal ESRSYC is applied when synchronous control and synchronous control is not exercised. spindle synchronous con
Page 916B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE 1 The second spindle is initialized to Cs contour axis control mode. At this time, the position of the second spindle will be undefined, so that reference position return must be performed for the first and second spindles. In this case, the reference
Page 9179. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 D Positional deviation During simple spindle synchronous control, indications such as the display positional deviation of the first spindle are output in the usual way. For the second spindle, however, only the positional deviation of the second spindle is
Page 918B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows: -- Activates the parking function for the second spindle placed under simple spindle synchronous control. When the SPK bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 4800) is set to 1, #7 of G031
Page 9199. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3701 SS2 [Data type] Bit type NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. SS2 Under serial spindle control, the second serial spindle is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used.
Page 920B--63003EN--1/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 4811 Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the serial spindle synchronization control mode [Data type] Word type [Unit of data] Pulse [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the allowable error count for the error pulses between two s
Page 9219. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Diagnosis screen D Positional deviation display while spindle synchronous control is applied 414 Master spindle motion error while spindle synchronous control or simple spindle synchronous control is applied 415 Slave spindle motion error while spindle sync
Page 922B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS 10 TOOL FUNCTIONS 903
Page 92310. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 10.1 TOOL FUNCTION General (M series) Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after address T. (T series) Selection of tools and offset amounts can be done by commanding tool numbers and offset numbers with up to an
Page 924B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5002 LGN LD1 [Data type] Bit LD1 Offset number of tool offset (Wear offset number when option of tool geometry/wear compensation is selected) 0 : Specified using the lower two digits of a T code 1 : Specified using the lower one digit of a
Page 92510. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE When a move command and a tool function are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways: (i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and tool function commands. (ii) Executing tool function commands upon com
Page 926B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS 10.2 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/ TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/ TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY General (M series) Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values and tool wear compensation values (Fig. 10.2 (a)). The geometry compensation and wear compensatio
Page 92710. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 (2) Tool compensation memory B Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is prepared separately in tool compensation memory B. Geometry compensation and wear compensation can thus be set separately. There is no difference between cutter compensation (
Page 928B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the CRT/MDI panel or from a program. A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the corresponding code is specified after address T in a program. The value is used for tool offset or
Page 92910. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3109 DWT [Data type] Bit DWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation amount 0 : The characters are displayed at the left of each number. 1 : The characters are not displayed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 32
Page 930B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5002 WNP LGN [Data type] Bit LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset (When the option of tool geometry/ wear compensation is selected, it is effective.) 0 : Is the same as wear offset number 1 : Specifies the geometry offset number by the
Page 93110. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 This parameter sets the maximum value of tool wear compensation. The following alarm or warning will be informed when the tool wear compensation (absolute value) exceeding this setting value is set. Input from MDI Too many digits Input by G10 P/S 32 offset value i
Page 932B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.8 TOOL COMPENSATION VAL- 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) UES, NUMBER OF COM- (B--63014EN) PENSATION VALUES, AND EN- TERING VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.5 TOOL COMPENSATION VAL- (For La
Page 93310. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 10.3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT General When tools are classified into several groups, average tool life (No. of uses or time) is designated for each group. Whenever a tool is used, the usage time is subtracted from the tool life; when the tool life expires, the next to
Page 934B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS [Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows: · Clears all executable data, including the life count of the group. If the same group is specified after machining is resumed, the first tool in the group is selected. NOTE Tool change
Page 93510. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 (i) Designate the group number for the tool by tool group number selection signal then turn the tool skip signal TLSKP to “1”. The next T-code command will pass over the current tool in the group for which the skip was designated, and select the next tool. (ii)Tur
Page 936B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Tool group number select signal TL01 to TL256 (M series) TL01 to TL 64 (T series) [Classification] Input signal [Function] When the TLRST or TLSKP signals are input, the tool group number must be given in advance, using the tool gr
Page 93710. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G047 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01 G048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP TL256 G049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0 G050 *TLV9 *TLV8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F064 TLCHI TLNW TLCH Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Page 938B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS SNG Input of the tool skip signal when a tool that is not considered tool life management is selected. 0 : Skips the tool of the group used last or of the specified group (using SIG, #3 of parameter No. 6800). 1 : Ignores a tool skip signal IGI Tool back number 0
Page 93910. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 M6E When a T code is specified in the same block as M06 0 : The T code is processed as a return number or as a group number selected next. Either is set by parameter M6T No. 6800#7. 1 : The tool group life is counted immediately. 6810 Tool life management ignored
Page 940B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Alarm and message Number Message Description 149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was spe- cified as the life count type in the extended tool life management. 150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allow- NUMBER able value.
Page 94110. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 10.4 CUTTER COMPENSATION 10.4.1 Cutter Compensation B, C (M Series) General When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the tool. To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, first create an offset vector with a length equal to t
Page 942B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Cutter compensation cancel Start--up Fig. 10.4.1 (b) Outline of cutter compensation C Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5001 OFH [Data type] Bit OFH Offset number of tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tool offset 0 : Specifies the tool length compen
Page 94310. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5003 CCN SUV SUP [Data type] Bit SUP Start up or cancel in cutter compensation C 0 : Type A 1 : Type B SUV When G40, G41, and G42 are specified independently, 0 : The start up and cancel operation conforms to the standard specification. 1 :
Page 944B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Alarm and message Number Message Description 033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be deter- mined for cutter compensation C. Modify the program. 034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to be ST--UP /EXT BLK performed in the G02 or
Page 94510. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 10.4.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (T Series) General It is difficult to produce the compensation necessary to form accurate parts when using only the tool offset function due to tool nose roundness in taper cutting or circular cutting. The tool nose radius comp
Page 946B--63003EN--1/02 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5003 CCN [Data type] Bit CCN When automatic reference position return (G28) is specified in the cutter compensation C mode (M series) or in tool nose radius compensation (T series): 0 : The cutter compensation vector is cancelled in movemen
Page 94710. TOOL FUNCTIONS B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be deter- mined for tool nose radius compensa- tion. Modify the program. Modify the program. 034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to be ST--UP /EX
Page 948B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11 PROGRAM COMMAND 929
Page 94911. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 11.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/ POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING General Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following
Page 950B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Alarm and message Number Message Description 007 ILLEGAL USE OF DEC- Decimal point “ ∙ ” input error (A decimal IMAL POINT point was input after an address with which it can not be used. Or multiple decimal points were input.) Modify the program. Reference item S
Page 95111. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 11.2 G CODE SYSTEM (T SERIES) General There are three G code systems : A,B, and C (Table 11.2). Select a G code system using parameter GSC (No. 3401#7) and parameter GSB (No. 3401#6). Table 11.2 G code list (1/3) G code Group Function A B C G00 G00 G00 Positionin
Page 952B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Table 11.2 G code list (2/3) G code Group Function A B C G50.2 G50.2 G50.2 Polygonal turning cancel (G250) (G250) (G250) 20 G51.2 G51.2 G51.2 Polygonal turning (G251) (G251) (G251) G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting 00 G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate syst
Page 95311. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Table 11.2 G code list (3/3) G code Group Function A B C — G90 G90 Absolute programming 03 — G91 G91 Incremental programming — G98 G98 Return to initial level 11 — G99 G99 Return to R point level Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3401 GSC GSB [Data type] Bit GSB,
Page 954B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Note NOTE 1 If the CNC enters the clear state (see bit 6 (CLR) of parameter 3402) when the power is turned on or the CNC is reset, the modal G codes change as follows. (1) G codes marked with in Table 11.2 are enabled. (2) When the system is cleared due to power-
Page 95511. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.3 PREPARATORY 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) APPENDIX E STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.3 PREPARATORY (For Lathe) (B--63084EN
Page 956B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION General A program consists of the following components: Table 11.3 Program components Components Descriptions Tape start Symbol indicating the start of a program file Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc. Program sta
Page 95711. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 CTV Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit CTV: Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program. 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3201 NPE N99 [Data type] Bit N99 With an M99
Page 958B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Alarm and message Number Message Description 001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). 002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will be gener- ated only when the TV check is effective
Page 95911. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 11.4 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION General Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code. Signal Inch input signal INCH [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that inch input mode is in progress. [Output condition] “1”indicates t
Page 960B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx NOTE When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before continuing operation. [Data type] Bit axis ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis ROSx ROTx Description 0 0 Linear axis D Inch/metric conversion is done. D A
Page 96111. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm (Metric input) Linear axis 0.001 0.0001 0
Page 962B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3104 MCN [Data type] Bit MCN Machine position is: 0 : Not displayed according to the unit of input. (Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for inc
Page 96311. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Warning WARNING When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and vice versa, the tool compensation value must be re--set according to the least input increment. However, when bit 0 (OIM) of parameter 5006 is 1, tool compensation values are automatically
Page 964B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.5 HIGH SPEED CYCLE CUTTING General This function can convert the machining profile to a data group that can be distributed as pulses at high-speed by the macro compiler and macro executor. The function can also call and execute the data group as a machining cy
Page 96511. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 D Configuration of high-- Data for the high speed cycle cutting is assigned to variables (#20000 to speed cycle cutting data #85535) for the high--speed cycle cutting by the macro compiler and macro executor. Configuration of the high speed cycle cutting data #20
Page 966B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Explanations D Cycle repetition count Specify the repetition count for the cycle. Values from 0 to 32767 can be specified. When 0 or 1 is specified, the cycle is executed once. D Cycle connection data Specify the number (1 to 999) of the cycle to be executed afte
Page 96711. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7501 IPC IT2 IT1 IT0 CSP IPC IT2 IT1 IT0 [Data type] Bit CSP Cs contouring control function dedicated to a piston lathe is 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. IT0, IT1, IT2 IT2 IT1 IT0 0 0 0 Interpolates the G05 data in 8ms 0 0 1 Interpolate
Page 968B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND HUNx Specifies whether the unit of data to be distributed during cutting in a high-speed cycle is ten times the least input increment. 0 : The unit of data is the same as the least input increment. 1 : The unit of data is ten times the least input increment. NOTE
Page 96911. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Number Message Description 178 G05 COMMANDED IN G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 G41/G42 MODE mode. Correct the program. 179 PARAM. (NO. 7510) The number of controlled axes set by the SETTING ERROR parameter 7510 exceeds the maximum number. Modify the parameter s
Page 970B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.6 CUSTOM MACRO 11.6.1 Custom Macro General Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general progr
Page 97111. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 P : Macro number of bolt hole circle r : Radius ∼ : Start angle ϒ : Angle between circles k : Number of circles Signal Custom Macro Input Signal UI000 to UI015 [Classification] Input signal [Function] No function is provided for the control unit. The
Page 972B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND [Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or written by a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between custom macros and the PMC. These signals correspond to system variables as ind
Page 97311. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter D Setting for single block stop #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6000 SBM [Data type] Bit SBM Custom macro statement 0 : Not stop the single block 1 : Stops the single block D Other settings #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6001 CLV CCV TCS CRO PV5 PRT [Data type] Bit PR
Page 974B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Setting when macro statement is input/output with EIA code #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0 6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0 6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0 6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0 [Data type] Bit These parameters
Page 97511. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 D Setting G codes that call custom macros of program Nos.9010 to 9019 6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010 6051 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9011 6052 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9012 6053
Page 976B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called by M00. D Setting M codes that call custom macros of no.9020 to 9029 6080 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9020 6081 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9021 6082
Page 97711. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 076 ADDRESS P NOT Address P (program number) was not com- DEFINED manded in the block which includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program. 077 SUB PROGRAM The subprogram was called in five folds. NESTING ERR
Page 978B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Number Message Description 116 WRITE PROTECTED The left side of substitution statement is a VARIABLE variable whose substitution is inhibited. Modify the program. 118 PARENTHESIS NESTING The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper ERROR limit (quintuple). Modify the
Page 97911. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15 Custom macro 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15 Custom macro (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15 Custom macro (For Machining Center) (B--63094EN)
Page 980B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.6.2 Interruption Type Custom Macro General When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program an interrup
Page 98111. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program operation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input to execute the program specified by Pxxxx. Any interrupt signal (UNIT, asterisked in Fig. 11.6.2) issued after M97 is ignored. Do not ente
Page 982B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code 0 : M96/M97 1 : M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034) MSB Interrupt program 0 : Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro--type interrupt) 1 : Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram-
Page 98311. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.11 Interruption type custom macro 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.11 Interruption type custom macro (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.11 Int
Page 984B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Example) When this parameter is set to 10, the custom macro variables are specified as follows: Custom macro variables 100 to 109: Used commonly between two paths Custom macro variables 110 to 149: Used independently for each path NOTE 1 This parameter is dedicat
Page 98511. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 11.7 CANNED CYCLE (M SERIES)/CANNED CYCLE FOR HOLE MACHINING (T SERIES) General Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a canned cycle, a frequently--used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G function; w
Page 986B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND SPINDLE CONTROL In some canned cycles, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse direction may be output. The following canned cycles require spindle control: M series T series Reverse tapping cycle G74 Face tapping cycle (G84) Fine boring cycle G76 Side
Page 98711. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 D G74 (Counter tapping cycle) X, Y Z Z Z Dwell Dwell (Note) (Note) Note) It is possible to not output M05 M03 M05 M04 M05 code by using parame- ter M5T (No. 5101#6). MF MF MF MF Next block (G98 mode) FIN FIN FIN FIN Next block (G99 mode) D G76 (Fine boring cycle)
Page 988B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D G86 (Boring cycle) X, Y Return to initial level in G98 mode Z Z M05 M03 M03 MF MF MF FIN FIN FIN Next block (G98 mode) D G87 (Back boring cycle) Next block (G99 mode) X or Y X or Y X, Y X or Y Z Z Z Dwell (Note 2) (Note 2) M05 M19 M03 M05 M19 M03 MF MF MF MF MF
Page 98911. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 D G84 (Face tapping cycle) G88 (Side tapping cycle) X, C (Z, C) Z (X) Z (X) Z Z (X) Dwell Dwell (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 2) M05 M04 M05 M03 MF MF MF MF Next block (G98 mode) (Note 1) When parameter M5T FIN FIN FIN FIN (No. 5101#6)=0, M05 is not output. Ne
Page 990B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Signal Tapping signal TAP [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode. [Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when: -- The system is in tapping cycle mode. G74, G84: M series G84, G88: T series -- The system is
Page 99111. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 RD2, RD1 Set the axis and direction in which the tool in drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is got free. RD2 and RD1 are set as shown below by plane selection. RD2 RD1 G17 G18 G19 0 0 +X +Z +Y 0 1 --X --Z --Y 1 0 +Y +X +Z 1 1 --Y --X --Z M5T When a spindle rotates
Page 992B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 5110 C--axis clamp M code in drilling canned cycle [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 99 This parameter sets the C--axis clamp M code in a drilling canned cycle. 5111 Dwell time when C--axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle [Data type] Word
Page 99311. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 5114 Return or clearance value of drilling canned cycle G83 Return value of high--speed peck drilling cycle G73 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS ---A IS ---B IS ---C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Val
Page 994B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 5115 Clearance canned cycle G83 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS ---A IS ---B IS ---C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 G83 for M series q : Depth of cut d : Clearance value
Page 99511. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.1 Canned cycle 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.3 Canned cycle for hole machining (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.1 Canned cycle (For Machi
Page 996B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.8 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION (M SERIES) General Upon completion of positioning in each block in the program, an external operation function signal can be output to allow the machine to perform specific operation. G81 IP_ ; (The IP_ is axis move command ) Every t
Page 99711. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Signal External Operation Signal EF [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports that the positioning of G81 has been completed in the external motion function, and that a special external operation is required. [Output condition] For details of the
Page 998B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.9 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) General This option canned cycles to make CNC programming easy. For instance, the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough machining. And also, a canned cycles for the
Page 99911. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Chamfering signal CDZ [Classification] Input signal [Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamfering distance in parameter No. 5130. [Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threading cyc
Page 1000B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a check to see if the program contains a block that has the sequence number specified in address Q is: 0 : Not made. 1 : Made. (If the sequence number specified in address Q cannot be found, a
Page 100111. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 D Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G73 5135 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in X--axis direction 5136 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in Z--axis direction [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Increment system IS ---A IS --
Page 1002B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 5140 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Increment system IS ---A IS ---B IS ---C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.001 0
Page 100311. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 061 ADDRESS P/Q NOT Address P or Q is not specified in G70, FOUND IN G70--G73 G71, G72, or G73 command. Modify the program. 062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1 The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero or G71--G76 negative value. 2
Page 1004B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Cautions for multiple 1 Necessary parameters (such as P, Q, X, Z, U, W, and R) must be set repetitive canned cycle correctly for an individual block that specifies a multiple repetitive (G70 to G76) canned cycle. 2 In G71, G72, and G73 blocks having a sequence nu
Page 100511. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.1 Canned cycle 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) II.13.2 Multiple repetitive canned cycle Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.1 Canned cycle (For Lathe) (B--63084EN) II.13.2 Multiple repetitive canned cyc
Page 1006B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.10 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRETS (T SERIES) General Mirror image can be applied to X--axis with G code. G68 : Double turret mirror image on G69 : Mirror image cancel When G68 is designated, the coordinate system is shifted to the mating turret side, and the
Page 100711. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter D Distance between two turrets 1290 Distance between two turrets in mirror image [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range]
Page 1008B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.11 INDEX TABLE INDEXING FUNCTION (M SERIES) General By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining center can be indexed. Before and after indexing, the index table is automatic
Page 100911. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 (8) When *BECLP is turned to “0”, the CNC then turns BCLP to “0”, informing it received the *BECLP signal. (Type B -- When BCLP turns to “0”, the B axis position control servo is turned off.) (9) On the PMC side, when BCLP changes to “0”, *BECLP is turned to “1”.
Page 1010B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND B axis manual feed selection signal +Jb*1 B axis position control servo ON B axis unclamp signal BUCLP B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP B axis rotation B axis deceleration signal DECb*1 B axis return completion signal ZPb*1
Page 101111. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Signal B axis clamp signal BCLP [Classification] Output signal [Function] Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutch or shot pin. [Output condition] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
Page 1012B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G038 *BECLP *BEUCP #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F061 BCLP BUCLP Parameter D Setting linear or rotation axis #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx NOTE When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before continuing operatio
Page 101311. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 D Various setting for index table indexing #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5500 IDX G90 INC ABS REL DDP [Data type] Bit DDP Selection of decimal--point input method of index table indexing axis 0 : Conventional method (Example IS--B: B1; = 0.001 deg) 1 : Pocket calculato
Page 1014B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE Set ABS, #2 of parameter No. 5500, to 1. D Unit of index table indexing angle 5512 Unit of index table indexing angle [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm [Valid data range] 0 to 36000
Page 101511. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 Specify a rotation axis as the index table indexing axis. (Set 1 in the ROTx bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 1006).) 2 The servo off signal for the index table indexing axis is invalid. 3 Single direction positioning (G60) cannot be specified. 4 While the
Page 1016B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.12 SCALING (M SERIES) General A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling). The dimensions specified with X_, Y_, and Z_ can each be scaled up or down with the same or different rates of magnification. The magnification rate can be specified in th
Page 101711. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 D Scaling of each axis, Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative programmable mirror magnification is specified, a mirror image is applied. First of all, set a image (negative parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) which validates each axis s
Page 1018B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Parameter D Setting valid/invalid and magnification of scaling #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5400 SCR XSC [Data type] Bit XSC Axis scaling and programmable mirror image 0 : Invalidated (The scaling magnification is specified by P.) 1 : Validated SCR Scaling magnificati
Page 101911. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 D Scaling magnification for every axis 5421 Scaling magnification for every axis [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No. 5400) [Valid data range] −999999~−1, 1~999999 This parameter sets the scalin
Page 1020B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.13 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION General A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes possible, for example, to modify a program using a rotation command when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the programmed position
Page 102111. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 FORMAT G17 G18 G68 (G68.1)∼_ϒ_R_ ; Start rotation of a coordinate system. G19 Coordinate system rotation mode (The coordinate system is rotated.) G69 (G69.1); Coordinate system rotation cancel command Note:G68/G69 for M series, G68.1/G69.1 for T series. MEANING O
Page 1022B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Parameter D Angle specification method of coordinate system rotation #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5400 RIN [Data type] Bit RIN Coordinate rotation angle command (R) 0 : Specified by an absolute method 1 : Specified by G90 or G91 D Angular displacement used when no ang
Page 102311. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 11.14 THREE--DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION (M SERIES) General The coordinate system can be rotated about an axis by specifying the center of rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement. This coordinate conversion function is quite us
Page 1024B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Parameter D Setting relative position and absolute position #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3104 DAC DAL DRC DRL [Data type] Bit DRL Relative position 0 : The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset. 1 : The programmed position displayed does not
Page 102511. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT For startup of three--dimensional tool compensation or three--dimensional coordinate conversion, two or more axes were specified in the same direc- tion (basic and parallel axes.) 048 BASIC 3 AX
Page 1026B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.15 RETRACE (M SERIES) General A tool can retrace the tool path along which the tool has moved. This operation is referred to as retrace. In addition, a tool can move forward again along the path that the tool has retraced. This operation is referred to as re--
Page 102711. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Retrace signal (RVS) [Classification] Input signal [Function] Directs the control unit to retrace the tool along the path which the tool was moved in automatic operation (memory command, tape command, manual data input). [Operation] When RVS turns
Page 1028B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Position to which auxiliary function is output during retracing Retrace start (Retrace signal RVS is “1”) Block in which the move command and auxiliary function are included Retrace end Position to which auxiliary function Re--forwarding start is output during fo
Page 102911. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message While a tool is in retrace, the retrace--in--progress signal RVSL is sent, and the character string RVRS blinks on the CRT screen to signal that the tool is currently in retrace. When a tool is in re--forward, the character string RTRY blinks to
Page 1030B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.16 MACRO COMPILER/ EXECUTER General There are two types of NC programs; those which, once created, are scarcely changed, and those which are changed for each machining type. The former are programs created by the custom macro, and the latter are machining prog
Page 103111. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 11.17 SMALL HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (M SERIES) General This is a repetition of a peck drilling cycle in which when an overload torque detection signal (skip signal is used) is received with an arbor having an overload torque detection function during drilling, t
Page 1032B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Change of cutting The cutting conditions are changed at each pecking operation (forwarding conditions cutting retracting) during one G83 cycle. (Appropriate setting of bits 1 and 2 of parameter No. 5160 can specify that the cutting conditions are not to be ch
Page 103311. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Overload torque signal SKIP [Classification] Input signal [Function] Retracts a tool if an overload torque is applied it. [Operation] When this signal becomes “1”, the control unit operates as follows: S Assuming that an overload torque is applied
Page 1034B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload torque signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feed and spindle speed are: 0 : Not changed. 1 : Changed. 5163 M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of
Page 103511. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 5166 Percentage of cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted after an overload torque signal is received [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed when th
Page 1036B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 5170 Number of the macro variable to which the total number of retractions during cutting is output [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 100 to 149 This parameter sets the number of the macro variable to which the total number of times the tool is retracted during
Page 103711. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 5174 Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Unit Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm (millimeter input) Linear axis 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 to 3276
Page 1038B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.18 HIGH--SPEED CYCLE MACHINING RETRACTING General When high--speed cycle machining is to be interrupted, retracting can be performed by setting the high--speed cycle machining retract signal HSRT to 1. It is also possible to specify and execute a special type
Page 103911. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 When retracting begins, the retracting signal HSRA becomes 1. Once retracting begins, resetting the retract signal HSRT to 0 does not stop retract operation. [Example] (1) Parameter No. 7515 setting < remaining distribution count for the current cycle A
Page 1040B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND (2) Parameter No. 7515 setting >= remaining distribution count for the current cycle A number of pulses for retracting until the end of the current cycle are superimposed on a usual operation. When retracting ends, the CNC shifts to an automatic operation pause o
Page 104111. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 Previously registering a retract cycle in the high--speed cycle header causes the retract cycle to be executed after retracting. If the machining cycle data is cycle connection information indicating that connection of more than one machining cycle is attempted,
Page 1042B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND High--speed cycle header Bit 7 of the data type specification variable in the high--speed cycle header specifies whether to enable retracting. If this bit is off, the retract signal HSRT is ignored; so neither retracting nor retract cycle is executed. Data type s
Page 104311. PROGRAM COMMAND B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE P--code variable numbers enclosed in parentheses apply to data variable addition A/B. Signal High-- speed cycle machining retract signal HSRT [Classification] Input signal [Function] Starts high--speed cycle machining retracting. [Operation] When thi
Page 1044B--63003EN--1/02 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Parameter 7514 Escape direction and speed for high--speed cycle machining retracting [Data type] Two--word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS--A, IS--B IS--C --30 ~ --240000 --30 ~ --100000 Millimeter machine
Page 104512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 1026
Page 1046B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1 DISPLAY/SET 12.1.1 Clock Function General Time is displayed in the hour/minute/second format on each display screen. Some screens allows display of the year, month, and day. The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time. The time will be tol
Page 104712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.1.2 Displaying Operation History General This function displays a history of the key and signal operations, performed by the CNC operator, upon the occurrence of a failure or CNC alarm. The history can also be displayed for previously generated CNC alarms. Th
Page 1048B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Minutes [Valid data range] 0 to 1439 Time data is recorded in operation history at set intervals. When 0 is specified in this parameter, 10 minutes is assumed as the
Page 104912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.1.3 Help Function General The help function displays on the screen detailed information about alarms issued in the CNC and about CNC operations. The following information is displayed. D Detailed information of When the CNC is operated incorrectly or an erron
Page 1050B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.4 Displaying Alarm History General Up to 25 of the most recent CNC alarms are stored and displayed on the screen. The following information items are displayed. (1) The date the alarm was issued (2) Alarm No. (3) Alarm message (some contains no message) Ref
Page 105112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series MAINTENANCE MANUAL 5.2 Servo Tuning Screen 16i/160i/18i/180i/ (B--63005EN) 21i/210i 12.1.6 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen General On the spindle setting and tuning screen, parameters required for basic adjustment of the serial spindle an
Page 1052B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.7 Waveform Diagnosis Display General Waveform diagnosis is classified into two main types. (1) One--shot type One--shot waveform diagnosis provides graphs of waveforms to illustrate changes in the following data. In one--shot waveform diagnosis, the start o
Page 105312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 3120 Time from the output of an alarm to the termination of sampling (waveform diagno- sis function) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 1 to 32760 This parameter specifies the time allowed from the time a servo alarm condition occurs until dat
Page 1054B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.8 Self--diagnosis General When a breakdown occurs, in order to quickly determine the cause, the following should be done. First, it has to be determined as to whether the breakdown occurred in the CNC internal section, or the PMC or machine side. There are
Page 105512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.1.9 Display of Hardware and Software Configuration General The required hardware/software configuration for CNC maintenance can be displayed on the screen. The system configuration screen displays the following information: (1) Printed circuit board configura
Page 1056B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.10 Position Display Neglect General Indication of the current position can be suppressed by setting bit 0 (NDPx) of parameter No. 3115, or by issuing the position indication ignore signal. Bit 1 (NDAx) of parameter No. 3115 enables the display of positions
Page 105712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 NDAx NDPx [Data type] Bit axis NDPx Display of the current position for each axis 0 : The current position is displayed. 1 : The current position is not displayed. NDAx Position display using absolute coordinates and relati
Page 1058B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Signal Target part count reached signal PRTSF [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have been machined. [Output condition] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when: ⋅ Machining of the specified number of
Page 105912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6700 PCM [Data type] Bit PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts 0 : M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 1 : Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710 67
Page 1060B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT NOTE When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1, the number of parts is not counted with M02 and M30. 6713 Number of required parts Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] One piece [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 This parameter sets th
Page 106112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 6753 Integrated value of cutting time Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] One ms [Valid data range] 0 to 60000 6754 Integrated value of cutting time Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] One minute [Valid
Page 1062B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Two--word [Unit of data] One ms [Valid data range] 0 to 60000 6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) Setting entry is
Page 106312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.1.12 Graphic Display/ Dynamic Graphic Display/Background Graphic General Graphic Display It is possible to draw the programmed tool path on the screen, which makes it possible to check the progress of machining, while observing the path on the screen. In addi
Page 1064B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT HEAD1 O0001 N00021 HEAD2 O0020 N00020 X1 X1 200.000 X2 X2 220.000 Z1 200.000 Z2 160.000 Z1 Z2 62.5 62.5 MEM STRT *** FIN 08 : 24 : 56 HEAD1 G.PRM GRAPH ZOOM (OPRT) T series (Two--path control) Dynamic graphic display There are the following two functions in Dyna
Page 106512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 SOLID GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1126 N01126 Z Y X A.ST F.ST STOP REWIND Part Machined Background graphic The background graphic function allows a programmed tool path to be (M series) drawn on the screen while machining is being performed by another program. When the
Page 1066B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3003 MVG [Data type] Bit MVG While drawing using the dynamic graphics function (with no machine movement), the axis--in--movement signal is: 0 : Output 1 : Not output #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3109 BGO BGO Response when the
Page 106712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 DPO Current position on the solid drawing (machining profile drawing) or tool path drawing screen 0 : Not appear 1 : Appears When the background graphic function is used, modal information items F, S, and T are displayed, together with the current position. When
Page 1068B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 6509 Coordinate system for drawing a single spindle (2--path control) Z X1 X2 Z Z X2 X1 X2 X1 GRPAX=0, 10 GRPAX=1, 11 GRPAX=2, 12 Z X1 X2 X2 X1 Z Z X2 X1 GRPAX=3, 13 GRPAX=4, 14 GRPAX=5, 15 Z X1 Z X2 X1 X2 GRPAX=6, 16 GRPAX=7, 17 [Data type] Byte [Valid data ran
Page 106912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 6510 Drawing coordinate system [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 7 This parameter specifies the drawing coordinate system for the graphic function. The following show the relationship between the set values and the drawing coordinate systems. Set value =
Page 1070B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 6511 Right margin in solid drawing 6512 Left margin in solid drawing 6513 Upper margin in solid drawing 6514 Lower margin in solid drawing [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Dot These parameters set the machining profile drawing position in margins on the screen. T
Page 107112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8100 NWP RST [Data type] Bit type RST When the reset key on the MDI panel is pressed: 0 : The reset is effective for both paths. Alternatively, the reset is effective for both the machining side and the background graphic side (M series).
Page 1072B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.13 Displaying Operating Monitor General The reading on the load meter can be displayed for each servo axis and the serial spindle. D Display of the servo axes The reading on the load meter can be displayed for up to three servo axes by setting parameters 31
Page 107312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 2086 Rated current parameter (RTCURR) [Data type] Word axis 4127 Load meter displayed value for maximum output [Data type] Word axis Note NOTE The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter 2086 and spindle parameter 4127. These parameters are set by t
Page 1074B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.14 Stamping the Machining Time General When a program is executed, its main program machining time is displayed on the program machining time display screen. The machining time can be displayed, in hours, minutes, and seconds format, for up to 10 main progr
Page 107512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE When M02 does not reset the control unit, and completion signal FIN is sent to continuously reexecute the program from the beginning (when bit 5 (M02) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 0), counting of machining time is terminated by completion signal FIN
Page 1076B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.15 Software Operator’s Panel General The software operator’s panel function replaces part of the control switches on the machine operator’s panel with soft switches which can be turned on or off using the MDI of the control unit. The control switches for th
Page 107712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 Signal Group Function Output signal Related input signal 1 Mode selection MD1O MD1 MD2O MD2 MD4O MD4 ZRNO ZRN 2 Jog feed axis select +J10 -- +J40 +J1 -- +J4 --J10 -- --J40 --J1 -- --J4 Manual rapid tra- RTO RT
Page 1078B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0 F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O F074 F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O F
Page 107912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 OP7 Feed hold on software operator’s panel 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed 7210 Jog--movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel “” 7211 Jog--movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel “” 7212 Jog--movement axis and its direc
Page 1080B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Example Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. [8↑] to the positive direction of the Z axis, [2↓] to the negative direction of the Z axis, [6→]
Page 108112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter No. 7223: Sets the character code (078) corresponding to N of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No. 7224: Sets the character code (065) corresponding to A of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No. 7225: Sets the character code (076) corresponding to L of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No. 72
Page 1082B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Character to Code Correspondence Table Char Com- Char Char Com- Char Code Code Comment Code Code Comment acter ment acter acter ment acter A 065 6 054 177 209 B 066 7 055 178 210 C 067 8 056 179 211 D 068 9 057 180 212 E 069 032 Space 181 213 F 070 ! 033 Exclama
Page 108312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft switches. When the mode for DNC operation is to be equipped, for example, all control switches for mode selection should be on the machine operator’s panel or a general--purpose soft switch should be
Page 1084B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT NOTE 4 The following table lists the override values which can be selected by soft switches for jog feedrate. *JV00 -- *JV150 (*JV0 -- *JV150) 15 12 8 4 0 Override ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ values (%) bit 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.1
Page 108512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 5 The following table lists the override values which can be selected by soft switches for feedrate override. *FV0O -- *FV7O (*FV0 -- *FV7) Override 7 4 0 values (%) ↓ ↓ ↓ 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 10 2 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 20 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 30 4
Page 1086B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.10 Displaying and Setting the Soft- 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) ware Operator’s Panel (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.13 Displaying and Setting the Soft- (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) ware Operator
Page 108712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.1.16 Multi--language Display General The LCD screens are displayed in a parameter--set language. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3102 SPN HNG ITA CHI FRN GRM JPN #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3119 POR DAN POR [Data type] Bit type NOTE When this parameter is set,
Page 1088B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.17 Remote Diagnosis General The remote diagnosis function allows CNC status monitoring and modification to CNC data to be performed remotely by menu--based operation. The remote diagnosis function, operating under MS--DOS, is installed on a standard persona
Page 108912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 c. CNC → computer (1) Alarm information (2) Machine position (3) Absolute position (4) Skip position (5) Servo delay (6) Acceleration/deceleration delay (7) Diagnosis (8) Parameter (9) Tool life management data (10) Display screen status (11) Modal information (
Page 1090B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.18 External Operator Message Logging and Display General External operator messages can be logged in a history file. These messages can be displayed on the external operator message history screen. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3112 OMH [Data type] Bit
Page 109112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.7.1 External operator message log- 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) ging and display (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.7.1 External operator message log- (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) ging and display Series
Page 1092B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.19 Erase Screen Display/Automatic Erase Screen Display General Displaying the same characters in the same positions on the screen causes a LCD to degrade relatively quickly. To help prevent this, the screen can be cleared by pressing specific keys. It is al
Page 109312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 D Automatic erase screen Automatic erase screen display cancel signal *CRTOF (G062#1) is valid display cancel signal only for the signals for path 1. This signal is invalid for the signals of path 2 (G1062#1) and those of the loader (G062#1). D Clearing the scre
Page 1094B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Parameter 3123 Time until erase screen display is applied [Data type] Bytes [Unit of data] Minutes [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This parameter specifies the period that must elapse before the erase screen display is applied. If 0 is set, the screen is not cleared
Page 109512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.1.20 Touch Pad General A touch pad can be used on the LCD display, as follows: (1) The soft keys (F0 to F9, FR, and FL) in the lower section on the 10.4--inch color LCD/MDI panel are changed to those for the touch pad. (2) Touch pad operation substitutes for
Page 1096B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (2) Reception data sampling interval The coordinates of a point on the touch pad are output via an RS--232C interface. The information is received at sampling intervals of 50 ms. (3) Positional precision A positional precision of +2.5 mm can be maintained by per
Page 109712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 4 Press the [TP CAL] soft key. The following touch pad compensation screen appears. CALIBRATION OF TOUCH PANEL PLEASE PUSH CALIBRATED POINTS (+ OF 9 POINTS). IF CALIBRATION IS ENDED, PLEASE PUSH KEY. IF CALIBRATION IS CANCELED, PLEASE PUSH KEY. IF
Page 1098B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled. As described in “Hardware connection,” the touch pad is connected to RS--232--C serial port 2 (JD36B) on the CNC motherboard. When the touch pad is used, serial port 2 (JD36B) is set up for touch pad operation, regardless of an I/O cha
Page 109912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.1.21 Periodic Maintenance Screen General The periodic maintenance screen shows the current statuses of those consumables that require periodic replacement (backup battery, LCD backlight, touch pad, etc.). An item whose service life has expired is indicated by
Page 1100B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (1)Consumables names The names of consumables to be subjected to periodic maintenance are set up here. They can be registered using either the corresponding menu or MDI keys. 1) Menu--based setup 1 To display the setting menu, place the cursor on the desired ite
Page 110112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 To delete a registered item name, place the cursor on it, and press the [CLEAR] soft key, then the [EXEC] soft key. [Machine consumables screen] PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345 (MACHINE) ITEM NAME 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 >_ EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:2
Page 1102B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT [CNC consumables screen] PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345 (NC) ITEM NAME 01 BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER 02 BATTERY FOR PULSECODER 03 FAN MOTOR 04 LCD BACK LIGHT 05 06 07 08 09 10 >_ EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:27:05 [ ][ STATUS ][ MACHIN ][ NC ][ (OPRT) ] [ SELECT
Page 110312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 (2) Remaining lifetime The remaining lifetime of an item is the time allowed before it must be replaced. It is displayed in a count--down format. When the remaining lifetime becomes less than the percentage specified in parameter No. 8911 of the corresponding se
Page 1104B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (1) Service life The service life of consumables can be specified here. To specify the service life, key in the corresponding data and press the [INPUT] soft key (or INPUT key). The same data is set up as both the service life and remaining lifetime. In addition
Page 110512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 If an attempt is made to enter data for an item number for which no item name or service life has been registered, the warning message “EDIT REJECTED” appears. 2 If an attempt is made to enter data that does not fall in the valid data range, the warning m
Page 1106B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT D Data output In EDIT mode, pressing the [PUNCH] soft key causes registered data to be output in the following formats. f Status and setting screens Format G10 L60 P01 Aa Rr [n] Qq ; G10 L60 P02 Aa Rr [n] Qq ; G10 L60 P03 Aa Rr [n] Qq ; : f Menu screen (machine
Page 110712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.2 EDIT 12.2.1 Part Program Storage Length General One of the following part program length can be selected. FS16i/160i (m) — 40 80 160 320 640 1280 2560 5120 FS18i/180i (m) 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280 — — FS21i/210i (m) 10 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280 — — FS20i--T
Page 1108B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.2.2 No. of Registered Programs General One of the following no. of registered programs can be selected. 63/125/200/400/1000 Alarm and message Number Message Description 072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option
Page 110912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.2.3 Memory Protection Key General A key called the data protection key is used to prevent part programs, offset values, parameters, and setting data from being registered, modified, or deleted erroneously. Signal Memory protection signal KEY1 to KEY4
Page 1110B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3290 KEY KEY For memory protection keys: 0 : The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used. 1 : Only the KEY1 signal is used. NOTE The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY = 0 or KEY = 1. Alarm and message Warning me
Page 111112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.2.4 Password Function General The password function locks NE9 (bit 4 of parameter No. 3202), used to protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999, by using the PASSWD (No. 3210) and KEYWD (No. 3211) parameters. When NE9 is locked, NE9 cannot be set to 0. Therefore, the
Page 1112B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 3210 Password(PASSWD) [Data type] Two--word Set a secret number to this parameter. Its value is not displayed. CAUTION This parameter show 0, when no value is set to this parameter. Once a key is lock, parameter NE9 cannot become 0 and PASSWD cannot be changed u
Page 111312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.9.9 PASSWORD FUNCTION 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.9.9 PASSWORD FUNCTION (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.9.9 PASSWORD FUNCTION (For Machinin
Page 1114B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT NOTE Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line of the background edit screen instead of the ordinary alarm screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation. Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.9.8 BACKGROUND EDITING 16i/160i/18i
Page 111512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B--63003EN--1/02 12.2.6 Playback General When the playback option is selected, the TEACH IN JOG mode (TJOG) and TEACH IN HANDLE mode (THND) are added. In these modes, a machine position along the X, Y, and Z axes obtained by manual operation is stored in memory as a program posi
Page 1116B--63003EN--1/02 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.2.7 Conversational Programming with Graphic Function General Programs can be created block after block on the conversational screen while displaying the G code menu. Blocks in a program can be modified, inserted, or deleted using the G code menu and conversti
Page 111713. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 1098
Page 1118B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE General The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher interface. 1. Program 2. Offset data 3. Parameter 4. Pitch error compensation data 5. Custom macro common variables. 1099
Page 111913. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter This CNC has three channels of input/output device interfaces. The input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel connected to that device in setting parameter I/O CHANNEL. The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number
Page 1120B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 3 0 : Select the device of channel 1 (I/O device connected to JD36A of motherboard) 1 : Select the device of channel 1 (I/O device con
Page 112113. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 This CNC MOTHERBOARD SERIAL COMMUNICATION BOARD Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 JD36A JD36B JD28A JD6A RS--232--C RS--232--C RS--232--C RS--422 Reader/puncher Reader/puncher Host computer Host computer I/ O CHANNEL=0 I/ O CHANNEL=2 I/ O CHANNEL=3 I/ O CHANNEL=
Page 1122B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA NFD Feed before and after the data at data output 0 : Output 1 : Not output NOTE When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1. 0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) [Data type] Byte
Page 112313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 (3) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0111 NFD ASI SB2 [Data type] Bit These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101. 0112 Number specified for the input/out
Page 1124B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Alarm and message Number Message Description 001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape. 002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will be generated only when the T
Page 112513. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 13.2 Refer to Remote Buffer DESCRIPTIONS (B--61802E--1) for detailed informetion of remote buffer. REMOTE BUFFER 1106
Page 1126B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.3 DNC1 INTERFACE General Refer to FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS(B--61782E) for detailed information of DNC1 interface. Parameter 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Byte Set value. :10 0133 Baud rate [D
Page 112713. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 0142 Station address of the CNC (DNC1 interface) [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 2 to 52 This parameter specifies the station address of the CNC when the CNC is connected via the DNC1 interface using multipoint connection. NOTE When this parameter is set
Page 1128B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA COMMUNICATION OPERATION O0001 N00000 DNC FILE SELECTION > MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53 [C--OPER][C--SERV][ ][ ][ ( OPRT ) ] 1109
Page 112913. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 (b) Service Screen Press soft key [C--SERV] and the following screen is displayed. Three pages are available and one of the pages is selected by page key. COMMUNICATION PARAMETER O0001 N00000 NC APPLICATION NAME HOST APPLICATION NAME > MDI *** STOP *** *** *
Page 1130B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA COMMUNICATION PARAMETER O0001 N00000 PASCAL STACK ADDRESS UPPER LIMIT 01ABC000 LOWER LIMIT 01ABC0FF SERVICE MODE 1 01010100 00000010 SERVICE MODE 2 01000000 00000001 FILE REQUEST TIME OUT 12345678 REMOTE REQUEST TIME OUT 12345678 > MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 1
Page 113113. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 [Setting procedure] 1 Put the system in the MDI mode. 2 Cause the setting screen or service screen to appear, and press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 3 Move the cursor to the item you want to specify, using the page and cursor keys. 4 Enter the setting value from t
Page 1132B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 5) Press the [INPUT] soft key to input the values. DNC FILE SELECTION O1000.PRGJ > MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53 [ STRING ] [ INPUT ] [ CLEAR ] [ INS. CH ] [ DEL. CH ] 6) Deleting the DNC file name D If you want to delete the entire name, press the [
Page 113313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 2. PARAMETER (1) Setting screen DESCRIPTION D DNC file selection To start DNC operation, specify a file name in the host computer. Format: Oxxxx. PRG (where xxxx is a four--digit decimal number.) (2) Service screen D CNC and host application names Specify th
Page 1134B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA * For the T series (two--path control), bits 08 to 11 correspond to M00 to M30 at HEAD2 respectively, and bits 12 to 15, at HEAD1. D Status post mask Not used D Alarm post This parameter specifies whether the bit position of a CNC alarm is posted to the host
Page 113513. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 13.4 Refer to an item of FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS ( B--61992E ) for detailed information of DNC2 interface. DNC2 INTERFACE 1116
Page 1136B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.5 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL General It is possible to request from the outside that a program be registered, collated, or output. D Registeration/Collation As triggered by the external read start signal EXRD, the background edit function saves programs
Page 113713. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 D There are some other conditions to determine whether a program can be registered or collated. For example, a program cannot be registered or collated, if a program with the same program number is being executed in the foreground processing. External Punch
Page 1138B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Background editing signal BGEACT [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the background edit function is operating. [Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1 when: D The [BG EDIT] soft key is pressed to put the CN
Page 113913. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 Read/punch alarm signal RPALM [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during program registeration, collation, or output triggered by the external read or punch start signal. [Output condi
Page 1140B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Parameter Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020)  0020 I/O CHANNEL 0101 Stop bit and other data I/O CHANNEL=0 Number specified for the in- Specify a channel for an 0102 (channel 1) put/output device input/output device. 0103 Baud rate I/ O CHANNEL
Page 114113. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 = 0, program registration is assumed to be: 0 : Completed 1 : Not completed NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be: 0 : Completed 1 : Not completed #7 #6 #5 #4 #
Page 1142B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Alarm and message Number Message Description 079 BP/S ALARM In memory or program collation,a pro- gram in memory does not agree with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in memory and those from the external device. 085 BP/S ALARM W
Page 114313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT
Page 1144B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.6 SIMULTANEOUS INPUT AND OUTPUT OPERATIONS (M SERIES) General While an automation operation is being performed, a program input from an I/O device connected to the reader/punch interface can be executed and stored in memory. Similarly, a program stored in
Page 114513. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 Output and run simultaneous mode select signal STWD [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal becomes logical 1, the control unit: D Selects the output and run simultaneous mode. To select the output and run simultaneous mode, it is
Page 1146B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA NOTE 1 If a value beyond the valid data range is specified, the number of the input program is registered. 2 When the eight--digit program number function is not provided, the program number should not be set in this parameter but in parameter 3218. Alarm an
Page 114713. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 13.7 EXTERNAL PROGRAM INPUT General By using the external program input start signal, a program can be loaded from an input unit into CNC memory. When an input unit such as the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy Cassette is being used, a file can be searched f
Page 1148B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Workpiece no. search signal File no. no PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 0 0 0 1 1 03 0 0 1 0 0 04 0 0 1 0 1 05 0 0 1 1 0 06 0 0 1 1 1 07 0 1 0 0 0 08 0 1 0 0 1 09 0 1 0 1 0 10 0 1 0 1 1 11 0 1 1 0 0 12 0 1 1 0 1 13 0 1 1 1 0 14 0 1 1 1 1 15 1 0 0 0 0 16 1 0 0 0 1 17 1
Page 114913. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 In this case, the general operation flow is as shown below. Press the cycle start button. Issuing the external program input start signal (MINP) starts program input. The automatic operation mode signal (STL) is set to 1, then program input starts. When inpu
Page 1150B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Execution of a machining program M code command for the Mxxx next program input Code signal M00~M31 Strobe signal MF Single--block signal SBK Completion signal FIN Cycle start lamp signal STL External program input MINP start signal Program input Automatic o
Page 115113. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 Note NOTE 1 A program can be input according to the external program input start signal only when the program has only one program number. To read programs having multiple program numbers, reset the CNC each time the CNC reads one program. After reset, searc
Page 1152B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS BASED ON THE I/O LINK General Power Mate programs, parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic (PMC) data are input/output through the FANUC I/O Link. With the FANUC I/O Link, slaves from group 0 to group 15 can be connected,
Page 115313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 D Basic data input/output (1) Program input/output procedure (a) Program input · When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used 1) Specify a number between 20 to 35 as the I/O channel on the setting screen to specify a group number. 2) Spe
Page 1154B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 5) Key in a program number. 6) Using soft keys [(OPRT)], continuous--menu key , [PUNCH], and [EXEC], output the program corresponding to the keyed--in program number. · When data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is used 1) Using the PMC function
Page 115513. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 (a) Macro variable input · When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used With Power Mate DI signals EDG00 to EDG15, specify a start number for the macro variables to be read. With EDN00 to EDN15, specify the number of macro variables to b
Page 1156B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (a) Diagnostic (PMC) data input · When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used With Power Mate DI signals EDG00 to EDG15, specify a start number for the diagnostic data items to be read. With EDN00 to EDN15, specify the number of diagnos
Page 115713. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 D Stopping input/output There are two methods of forcibly terminating input/output. (1) Termination by a reset Input/output can be terminated by a reset. In this case, however, slave read/write stop signal ESTPIO is not output. Therefore, the operation of th
Page 1158B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA D Power Mate state signals When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, the (input) state signals for a specified Power Mate must be reported to the Series 16i/18i/21i. These signals must be posted to the Series 16i/18i/21i via the foll
Page 115913. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 D DI/DO signal timing The DI/DO signal timing charts applicable when data input/output charts function B based on the I/O Link is used are shown below. When the ordinary data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, 1) through 4) in the figures a
Page 1160B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (6) (9) (10) (12) (3) (15) (1) I/O Link specification sig- nal IOLS (4) (15) (2) External read/punch sig- nal EXRD/EXWT (5) (3) I/O Link confirmation sig- nal IOLACK (13) (4) Power Mate read/write in-- progress signal BGION (5) Power Mate read/write alarm si
Page 116113. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 (2) When an alarm is issued by the Series 16i/18i/21i (including the case where processing is stopped by external read/punch signal EXSTP) Steps 1) to 10) are the same as those for ordinary input/output. 11) When the Series 16i/18i/21i issues an alarm, or wh
Page 1162B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (6) (9) (10) (12) (3) (15) (1) I/O Link specification signal IOLS (4) (2) External read/punch signal EXRD/EXWT (7) (15) (3) I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK (13) (4) Power Mate read/write in-- progress signal BGION (13) (5) Power Mate read/write alarm sig
Page 116313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 (3) When an alarm is issued by the Power Mate Steps 1) to 10) are the same as those for ordinary input/output. 11) When the Power Mate issues an alarm, Power Mate read/write alarm signal BGIALM is set to 1, and Power Mate read/write in--progress signal BGION
Page 1164B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (6) (9) (10) (3) (13) (1) I/O Link specification signal IOLS (4) (2) External read/punch signal EXRD/EXWT (7) (13) (3) I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK (11) (4) Power Mate read/write in-- progress signal BGION (11) (5) Power Mate read/write alarm signal B
Page 116513. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 D Troubleshooting The data input/output function based on the FANUC I/O Link is implemented by various elements such as ladder programs, I/O Link assignment, Series 16i/18i/21i parameters, and Power Mate parameters. So, problems may occur when the function i
Page 1166B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Symptom Cause and corrective action When an attempt is made to output I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK data to a Power Mate: is not set to 1. Series 16i/18i/21i: A ladder program error, I/O Link as- OUTPUT blinks con- signment error may prevent. tinuously
Page 116713. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 Symptom Cause and corrective action When an attempt is made to output Bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 is macro variables to a Power Mate: set to 1 (EIA code). Series 16i/18i/21i : The EIA code does not include #, Alarm 86 is issued. such that an ISO code m
Page 1168B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Power Mate read/write alarm signal BGIALM [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal indicates that an alarm has been issued while the Power Mate was performing data input/output. [Operation] This signal is set to 1 upon the issue of an al
Page 116913. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 I/O Link specification signal IOLS [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal specifies whether those signals that are shared by the external I/O device control function are to be used with data input/output function B based on the I/O Lin
Page 1170B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA -- When data input/output is terminated This signal is a Power Mate control signal. The corresponding Power Mate side signal is IOLNK (the second address being for Power Mate--MODEL D, F, H, and the first address for all other models). Slave
Page 117113. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 Slave external write start signal EWTIO [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the Series 16i/18i/21i has started data input. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: -- When data input is start
Page 1172B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA This signal is set to 0 in the following case: -- When data input/output is terminated This signal is a Power Mate control signal. The corresponding Power Mate side signal is EVAR (the second address being for Power Mate--MODEL D, F, H, and t
Page 117313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 Group number output signals SRLNO0 to SRLNO3 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate the group number of the Power Mate that is acting as a slave. [Operation] The group number of the Power Mate that is acting as a slav
Page 1174B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G091 SRLNI3 SRLNI2 SRLNI1 SRLNI0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G092 BGEN BGIALM BGION IOLS IOLACK #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F177 EDGN
Page 117513. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE An input/output device can also be selected using the setting screen. Usually the setting screen is used. 8760 Program number for data registration (data input/output function using the I/O link) [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 When the da
Page 1176B--63003EN--1/02 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Alarm and message Number Message Description 085 COMMUNICATION When entering data in the memory by using ERROR Reader / Puncher interface, or FANUC I/O Link an overrun, parity or framing error was gener- ated. The number of bits of input data or setting of b
Page 117714. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 14 MEASUREMENT 1158
Page 1178B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT 14.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) General The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory as an offset value by a soft key. Call offset value display screen on the CRT. Relative positions are also displayed on this screen. Then select
Page 117914. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 14.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/ AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) General When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of a command given to the CNC, the CNC automatically measures the difference between the current coordinate value
Page 1180B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance ƒ before the measuring position. The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by a parameter No. 6241. If the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the G code is turned “1” a
Page 118114. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10 msec. 2 The CNC directly inputs the measuring position reached signals from the machine tool; the PMC does not process them. 3 If automatic tool offset nor automatic tool length measurement is not used
Page 1182B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT CAUTION Set a radius value irrespective of whether the diameter programming or the radius programming is specified. 6254 ε value on X axis during automatic tool offset ε value during tool length automatic measurement 6255 ε value on Z axis during tool automatic offse
Page 118314. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 080 G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL In the automatic tool length measure- NOT ASSERTED ment function (G37), the measurement position reached signal (XAE, YAE, or ZAE) is not turned on within an area specified in parameter 6254 (value ⁄
Page 1184B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT Note NOTE 1 Measurement speed, ƒ, and ⁄ are set as parameters.⁄ must be positive numbers and keep condition of ƒ>⁄. 2 The compensation value is updated by the following formula: New compensation value =(Current compensation value)+[(Current position of the tool along
Page 118514. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) MEASUREMENT (G37) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.6 AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) (G36, G37) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.2
Page 1186B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT 14.3 SKIP FUNCTION 14.3.1 Skip Function General Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is interrupted and t
Page 118714. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec. 2 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP from the machine tool; the PMC no longer requires to process the signal. 3 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the signal terminal SKIP
Page 1188B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT Warning WARNING Disable feedrate override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration (enabled with parameter No. 6200#7 SKF=1) when the feedrate per minute is specified, allowing for reducing an error in the position of the tool when a skip signal is input. Th
Page 118914. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.16 SKIP FUNCTION(G31) 16i/160i/18i/180i (For Machining Center) (B--63014EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.13 SKIP FUNCTION(G31) (For Lathe) (B--63004EN) Series 21i/210i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.8 SKIP FUNCTION(G31) (For Machining C
Page 1190B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT (2) Type B: The deviation is assumed to be a sum of the number of remaining pulses due to acceleration/deceleration caused when the skip signal is turned on, and the positional error. Direction in which the tool moves High--speed skip signal Pnc Q P Position where Po
Page 119114. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE For type A (parameter SEA (No. 6201 #0)=1), the skip signal must be turned on when the tool moves at constant feedrate. Signal High Speed Skip Staus Signal HDO0 to HDO7 [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input stat
Page 1192B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 IGX SEB SEA [Data type] Bit type SEA When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used, acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are: 0 : Ignored. 1 : Considered and compensated (type A). SEB When a high speed skip si
Page 119314. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 14.3.3 Multi--step Skip General In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multi-step skip function stores coordinates in a custom macro variable and cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be moved when a skip signal (8 points) or high-speed
Page 1194B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT · The skip signal is monitored not for a rising edge, but for its state. So, if a skip signal continues to be “1”, a skip condition is assumed to be satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting or dwell operation is specified. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
Page 119514. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1 6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1 6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 6206 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1 [Data type] Bit type 1S1~1S8, 2S1~2S8, 3S1~3S8, 4S1~4S8, D
Page 1196B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT Note NOTE The skip cutting commands G31 P1, G31 P2, G31 P3, and G31 P4 are all identical, except that they correspond to different skip signals. The tool moves along the specified axis until the SKIP signal is set to “1” or the end point of the specified movement is
Page 119714. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 14.3.4 Torque Limit Skip General Specifying a move command after G31 P99 (or G31 P98) with a motor torque limit set (for example, specifying a torque limit on the PMC window) allows the same cutting feed as that specified with G01 to be performed. While the tool is m
Page 1198B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F114 TRQL8 TRQL7 TRQL6 TRQL5 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 TSA TSE [Data type] Bit type TSE When a skip operation is performed by the G31 P99 or P98 command used to specify torque limit skip: 0 :
Page 119914. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Alarm and message Number Message Description 015 TOO MANY AXES COM- In the block including the command for MANDED the skip function (G31 P99/P98), to be executed under the control of the torque limit reach signal, no axis move command is specified, or two or more axe
Page 1200B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT 14.3.5 Continuous High--speed Skip Function (M series) General The continuous high--speed skip function enables reading of absolute coordinates by using the high--speed skip signals (HDI0 to HDI7). Once a high--speed skip signal has been input in a G31P90 block, abso
Page 120114. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6200 SRE HSS [Data type] Bit type HSS 0 : The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals. 1 : The skip function uses high-speed skip signals. SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used: 0 : The signal is considered to be input
Page 1202B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6208 9S8 9S7 9S6 9S5 9S4 9S3 9S2 9S1 [Data type] Bit type 9S1 to 9S8 Specify valid high--speed skip signals for high--speed skip command G31P90. The bits correspond to signals as follows: 9S1 HDI0 9S2 HDI1 9S3 HDI2 9S4 HDI3 9S5 HDI4 9S6 HDI5 9
Page 120314. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Time interval during which signals are ignored (parameter No. 6220) High--speed skip signal These portions are ignored. Alarm and message Number Message Contents 5068 G31 P90 FORMAT No axis is specified for movement. ERROR Two or more axes were specified for move- me
Page 1204B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT 14.4 ENTERING COMPENSATION VALUES 14.4.1 Input of Offset Value Measured A (T series) General This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard. First the workpiece is cut in the longitu
Page 120514. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE To use this signal, set parameter PRC (No.5005#2) to 1. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G040 PRC Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5005 PRC [Data type] Bit type PRC Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shift value 0 : Not use
Page 1206B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT 14.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T series) General When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value is automatically settable in the tool offset memory, by moving the tool to make contact with the touch sensor during manual operation. The workpie
Page 120714. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 (Tool offset value to be set) = (Mechanical coordinate value when tool compensation value write signal has become “1”) -- (Reference value (parameter value) corresponding to the tool compensation value write signal) The tool offset value to be set differs according t
Page 1208B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT Example 2 The measuring reference point may be an imaginary point (imaginary zero point), as shown in the figure below. The difference between the imaginary zero point and the measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference point is settable as the tool
Page 120914. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Machine +X zero point Zt +Z OFSZ --EXOFSZ (0,0) Measuring tool nose position at the mechani- OFSX cal machine position Workpiece coordinate system zero point (programmed zero point) EXOFSz : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set OFSz : Tool geometry offs
Page 1210B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT Basic Procedure to Set (1) Execute manual reference position return. Tool Offset Value By executing manual reference position return, a machine coordinate system is established. The tool offset value is computed on the machine coordinate system. (2) Select manual han
Page 121114. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Basic Procedure to Set (1) Set the tool geometry offset values of each tool in advance. Workpiece Coordinate (2) Execute manual reference position return. Shift Value By executing manual reference position return, the machine coordinate system is established. The wor
Page 1212B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT Tool offset write signal +MIT1, +MIT2 --MIT1, --MIT2 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corre- sponding axis during manual operation. When signal GOQSM for select- ing th
Page 121314. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select signal WOQSM [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system. [Operation] When this signal is turned “1” in a manual operatio
Page 1214B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3003 DIT [Data type] Bit type DIT Interlock for each axis direction 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5005 QNI [Data type] Bit type QNI In the function of input of offset value measured B 0 : Not automatically select t
Page 121514. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Measuring reference position Xm X axis -- contact face Xp Z axis -- contact Z axis + contact face face +X Zm X axis + contact face Zp +Z 5020 Tool offset number used for the input of tool offset value measured B [Data type] Byte type [Valid data range] 0 to the numbe
Page 1216B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT 14.4.3 Input of Measured Workpiece Origin Offsets General By directly entering the measured deviation of the actual coordinate system from a programmed work coordinate system, the workpiece zero point offset at the cursor is automatically set so that a command value
Page 121714. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 14.5 TOOL LENGTH/ WORKPIECE ORIGIN MEASUREMENT B (M SERIES) General Two functions have been provided to measure the tool length: The automatic tool length measurement function (Section 14.2) automatically measures the tool length at a programmed command (G37); The to
Page 1218B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT The ten code signals (binary code) select a tool offset number. Code signals 0 to 998 correspond to tool offset numbers 1 to 999. NOTE This signal is valid only when the QNI bit (bit of 5 parameter No. 5005) is set to 1. Workpiece origin offset measurement mode selec
Page 121914. MEASUREMENT B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5005 QNI [Data type] Bit type QNI When the tool length measurement B function is executed, a tool offset number is selected: 0 : According to the selection the operator makes on an MDI unit (by moving the cursor). 1 : According to th
Page 1220B--63003EN--1/02 14. MEASUREMENT 5022 Distance from the reference tool tip position to the base measurement surface [Data type] 2--word axis type Increment system IS--A IS--B IS--C Millimeter machine 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch The distance L from the
Page 122115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 15 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 1202
Page 1222B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL General The PMC can directly control any given axis, independently of the CNC. In other words, moving the tool along axes that are not controlled by the CNC is possible by entering commands, such as those specifying moving distance and
Page 122315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 PMC CNC DI/ DO Commands from path 1 Group A ∼ axis control Commands from path 2 Group B ϒ axis control Commands from path 3 Group C ƒ axis control Commands from path 4 Group D ⁄ axis control In the following description, input/output signals from the four pa
Page 1224B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg (described later), determine one complete operation, which is tantamount to one block executed during CNC--controlled automatic operation. These signals may be collectively called the axis con
Page 122515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing buffer; command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer; and command [4] is transferred to the input buffer as the command block (axis control block data signal). Afte
Page 1226B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued. When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 to “0”. Before setting these signals to “0”, however, check that the blocks stored in the CNC’s input, w
Page 122715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 No. Symbol Signal name 17 EMBUFg Buffering disable signal 18 *EAXSL Control axis selection status signal 19 EINPg In--position signal 20 ECKZg Following zero checking signal 21 EIALg Alarm signal 22 EGENg Axis moving signal 23 EDENg Auxiliary function execut
Page 1228B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Signal Detail 1 Control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] When the signal is set to “1”, the corresponding axis becomes subject to PMC control. When the signal is set to “0”, PMC control becomes invalid. Changing th
Page 122915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Axis control command Operation (hexadecimal code) Cutting feed -- feed per revolution (exponential acceleration/ deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after inter- polation) 02h Performs the same operation as G95 G01, used by the CNC. Skip -- feed
Page 1230B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Axis control command Operation (hexadecimal code) External pulse synchronization -- 2nd manual handle 0Eh Synchronizes with the second manual handle. External pulse synchronization -- 3rd manual handle 0Fh Synchronizes with the 3rd manual handle. Speed comma
Page 123115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Reference without dogs The reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) enables the position return following operation: When DLZ, bit 1 of parameter No. 1002, specifying reference position return without dogs for all axes, or DLZx, bit 1 of paramet
Page 1232B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Speed command When using the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h), specify the axis to be controlled as a rotation axis in ROTX, bit 0 of parameter No. 1006. While position control is being executed for the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h), the speed
Page 123315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 When follow--up is not performed, an integrated travel value (error count) exceeding the value of parameter No. 1885 causes servo alarm 423 to be issued. When torque control is switched to position control, follow--up is always performed, even if follow--up
Page 1234B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION CAUTION 1 If the torque control axis may be moved in torque control mode, the follow--up parameter TRF (bit 4 of parameter No. 1803) must be set to “1”. 2 If torque control mode is canceled while the torque control axis is moving, the return to position cont
Page 123515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Axis control code Operation Command data signal EC0g to EC6g 1st reference position 07h Rapid traverse rate return EIF0g to EIF15g 2nd reference position 08h The rapid traverse rate return is valid when PRD, bit 0 of parameter No.No 8002 8002, 3rd reference
Page 1236B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (4) 3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 09h) (5) 4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 0Ah) (6) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g: 20h) For these commands, signals EIF0g to EIF15g are used to specify the rapid traverse rate, i
Page 123715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 [Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (Actual values must fall within the ranges given in the following table.) Data range Unit IS--B IS--C Linear Metric machine 1 to 100000 0.1 to 12000.0 mm/min axis Inch machine 0.01 to 4000.00 0.001 to 480.000 inch/min Rotation a
Page 1238B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION [Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (Actual values must fall within the ranges given in the following table.) Data range Unit IS--B IS--C Linear Metric input 0.01 to 500.00 mm/rev axis Inch input 0.0001 to 9.9999 inch/rev Rotation axis 0.01 to 500.00 deg/rev WARNI
Page 123915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE When diameter programming is specified with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005 can be used to specify whether a radius or diameter is to be used in a command. (14) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) Set the feedrate a
Page 1240B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION IS--B IS--C Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input Magni- 65535mm/min 655.35inch/ 6553mm/min 65.53inch/min fied by 1 min Magni- 655350mm/ 6553.50inch/ 65535mm/min 655.35inch/ fied by min min min 10 Magni- 13107000 131070.00 1310700mm/ 13107.00 fied
Page 124115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 (a) The speed command for PMC axis control requires specification of the servo motor speed, not the feedrate along an axis. To specify a feedrate along the axis when gears are used to link the servo motor and axis, the feedrate must be converted to a rotatio
Page 1242B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 4 Axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g [Classification] Input signal [Function] [Unit of data] IS--B IS--C Unit Metric input 0.001 0.0001 mm Degree input deg Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] (1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) (2) Cu
Page 124315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined. (7) Auxiliary functions (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) For this command, the signals are used to specify, in binary format, an auxiliary function code to be sent to the PMC. The auxiliary function code can be specified using eithe
Page 1244B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 6 Axis control command read completion signal EBSYg [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the system that the CNC has read a block of command data for PMC axis control and has stored the block in the input buffer. See “Basic procedure” for detai
Page 124515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 (2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation. (3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation when auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is input. The stopped operation can be restarted by setting this signal to “0”. 9 Block
Page 1246B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 13 Miscellaneous function 2 strobe signal EMF2g [Classification] Output signal 14 Miscellaneous function 3 strobe signal EMF3g [Classification] Output signal 15 Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg [Classification] Input signal [Function] When an auxil
Page 124715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 [Function] When this signal is set to “1”, commands from the PMC are not read while the executing, waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal is set to “1” when any of these buffers contain a block, that block is executed but subsequent comman
Page 1248B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (5) External pulse synchronization -- third manual handle (EC0g to EC6g: 0Fh) (6) Speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) 18 Control axis selection status signal *EAXSL [Classification] Output signal [Function] When this signal is set to “0”, control axis selectio
Page 124915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 20 Following zero checking signal ECKZg [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is set to “1” when following zero check or in--position check is being performed for the corresponding PMC--controlled axis. 21 Alarm signal EIALg [Classification]
Page 1250B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE This signal is set to “0” when distribution for the axis is completed (the signal is set to “0” during deceleration). 23 Auxiliary function executing signal EDENg [Classification] Output signal [Function] When an auxiliary function (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) i
Page 125115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 These signals are set to “0” when the overtravel alarm is released and reset signal ECLRg is set to “1”. See “Alarm signal EIALg” for details of how to release an overtravel alarm. 26 Feedrate override signals *FV0E to *FV7E [Classification] Input signal [Fu
Page 1252B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 28 Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate, independently of the CNC, by setting bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001. Rapid traverse o
Page 125315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 31 Override 0% signal EOV0 [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is set to “1” when the feedrate override is 0%. 32 Skip signal ESKIP [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal is set to “1” during executing the skip cutting co
Page 1254B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 36 External deceleration signals *+ED1 to *+ED8/*--ED1 to *--ED8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals are also used by the CNC. The signals are provided for each direction of the individual controlled axes. The plus or minus sign in the sig
Page 125515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 37 Accumulated zero check signal ELCKZg [Classification] Input signal [Function] Setting this signal to 1 causes an accumulated zero check between blocks to be made at a subsequent cutting feed command. (1) Cutting feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) (2) Cut
Page 1256B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA EFINA G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A For group A G146 EID7A EID6
Page 125715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC EFINC G167 EMSBKC EC6C EC5C EC4C EC3C EC2C EC1C EC0C G168 EIF7C EIF6C EIF5C EIF4C EIF3C EIF2C EIF1C EIF0C G169 EIF15C EIF14C EIF13C EIF12C EIF11C EIF10C EIF9C EIF8C For group C G170 EID7C EID6
Page 1258B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION CNC⌡PMC ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F112 EADEN8 EADEN7 EADEN6 EADEN5 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA For F131 EABUFA EMFA group A F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A
Page 125915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F182 EACNT8 EACNT7 EACNT6 EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1 F190 TRQM8 TRQM7 TRQM6 TRQM5 TRQM4 TRQM3 TRQM2 TRQM1 Parameter 1427 External deceleration speed of each axis [Data type] Word axis type [Unit of data] Valid data range Incre
Page 1260B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE This parameter is valid when the TRF (bit 4 of parameter 1803) is held 0. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2000 DGPRx [Data type] Bit axis type DGPRx At power--ON, the torque constant (parameter No. 2105): 0 : Is automatically set to the standard value specific
Page 126115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8001 SKE AUX NCC RDE OVE MLE [Data type] Bit type MLE Whether machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMC--controlled axes 0 : Valid 1 : Invalid NOTE Each--axis machine lock signals MLK1 to MLK8 are always valid, regardless of the settin
Page 1262B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8002 FR2 FR1 PF2 PF1 F10 SUE DWE RPD [Data type] Bit type RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC--controlled axes 0 : Feedrate specified with parameter No. 1420 1 : Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command DWE Min
Page 126315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8003 PIM NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off then back on again to make the setting effective. [Data type] Bit type PIM If a linear axis is controlled solely by the PMC, the commands for that axis are: 0 : Af
Page 1264B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE The above setting is effective only when the NAHx bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 1819) is set to 0. G8R If a rapid traverse command is specified for a PMC--controlled axis, look--ahead control is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. NOTE The above setting is effect
Page 126515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 NOTE 1 This parameter is valid when the DIAx bit (bit 3 of parameter 1006) is held 1. 2 When the CDI bit is set to 1, the NDI bit (bit 7 of parameter 8004) is invalid. R10 When the RPD bit (bit 0 of parameter 8002) is set to 1, the units for specifying the r
Page 1266B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE The maximum feedrate set to first axis is valid to all axes. The data of after second axis are invalid. 8028 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for jog feed specified by the speed command for each PMC--controlled axis [Data type] Word axis t
Page 126715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 (1) P/S Alarm Number Message Description 130 ILLEGAL AXIS An axis control command was given by OPERATION PMC to an axis controlled by CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis controlled by PMC. Modify the program. 139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC A
Page 1268B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Caution CAUTION 1 Emergency stop or machine lock is enabled. Machine lock can be disabled if the MLE bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 8001) is specified accordingly. However, machine lock for an individual axis is always enabled. 2 In consecutive cutting feed blo
Page 126915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 15.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT General The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC. Signal name Signal code Data signal for external data input (input) ED0 to ED15 Address signal for external data input (input) EA0 to EA6 Read signal for ex
Page 1270B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Kind of data accessed by external data input E ED15 to ED0 SEEE EEEE No No. Item TAAA AAAA 15141312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 B65 4 321 0 External program number Program number(BCD4 digits) 1 1 0 0 0  search 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 External tool compe
Page 127115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 1) External Program A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from the outside and is selected Number Search in the CNC memory. For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function can automatically select for execution the program correspon
Page 1272B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Data specification method in external tool compensation (For M series) Address Data E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E A A A A A A A D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 1 ABS 0 0 0 s MSB LSB / i
Page 127315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 3) External workpiece The external workpiece coordinate system shift adjusts the workpiece coordinate system coordinate system depending on the shift amount set via PMC. Each axis shift (parameter No. 1220) has this shift amount, and it is added to all the w
Page 1274B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE Two characters are sent at a time (see ISO code given in Table below). ED15 to ED8 . . . . . . Character code in 1st character. ED7 to ED0 . . . . . . . Character code in 2nd character. If sending only one character, fill the second slot with a code sma
Page 127515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 6) Substituting No. of Substitution is possible for the No. of parts required and the No. of parts parts required and No. machined. of parts, machined Data specifiecation method for No. of parts required and No. of parts machined. Address Data E E E E E E E
Page 1276B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Read completion signal for external data input EREND [Classification] Output signal [Function] The signal reports that the control unit has finished reading the entered data. [Operation] The output condition and procedure are described in the “basic
Page 127715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3202 PSR [Data type] Bit type PSR Search for the program number of a protected program 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6300 ESR [Data type] Bit type ESR External program number search 0 : Disabled 1 : Enable
Page 1278B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15.3 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH General When several part programs are stored in program storage memory, a program can be searched with the workpiece number search signals PN1 to PN16 from the machine side. When the cycle operation is actuated in the m
Page 127915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Workpiece number search signal Workpiece PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 number 1 0 0 0 0 16 1 0 0 0 1 17 1 0 0 1 0 18 1 0 0 1 1 19 1 0 1 0 0 20 1 0 1 0 1 21 1 0 1 1 0 22 1 0 1 1 1 23 1 1 0 0 0 24 1 1 0 0 1 25 1 1 0 1 0 26 1 1 0 1 1 27 1 1 1 0 0 28 1 1 1 0 1 29 1 1 1 1
Page 1280B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Note NOTE 1 This function can be used only in memory operation. It cannot be used during DNC operation and MDI operation. 2 Select the program number from O001 ℘ O031. 3 Program numbers from O001 to O031 can be used. However, programs corresponding to all th
Page 128115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 15.4 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC General The PMC can control the speed and polarity of each spindle motor, connected by the optional spindle serial output/spindle analog output function. The first, second, and third spindles all have their own individu
Page 1282B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Spindle speed Spindle motor speed data = × 4095 Maximum spindle speed By using this expression, the spindle motor speed data can be obtained easily. Specifying the output The PMC can specify the spindle motor output polarity when the polarity for the spindle
Page 128315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 To specify a rotation command for the second spindle, enter the gears to be used for the second spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data of the twelve code signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the data as the speed output command for the second sp
Page 1284B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION D Details of the signals D Signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SINDx The above signal is used to select whether the spindle motor speed is controlled by the CNC or PMC. 1: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands (R01Ix
Page 128515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Twelve code signals corresponding to the S value R01O to R12O [Classification] Output signal [Function] The S value, specified in the CNC part program, is converted to the speed output to the spindle motor that is required to control the c
Page 1286B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3705 EVS ESF SFA NSF ESF [Data type] Bit type ESF When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is used, and the constant surface speed control function is used or bit 7 (GTT) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
Page 128715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3709 MSI [Data type] Bit type MSI In multi--spindle control, the SIND signal is valid: 0 : Only when the first spindle is selected. (SIND signal for 2nd and 3rd spindle become invalid) 1 : For each spindle irrespective of whether the
Page 1288B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Note NOTE 1 If the spindle fails to move after the PMC issues the spindle motor speed command, check the following: Type A is selected (the MSI bit, bit 2 of parameter No. 3709, is set to 0) when the multispindle control function is used. The second or thi
Page 128915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 15.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT General MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interface signals. This allows the CNC to be controlled in the same way as when the operator performs MDI key operation. Control is realized by exchanging the following
Page 1290B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE Read processing is controlled by exclusive--ORing (XOR) the key code read signal (EKSET) with the read completion signal (EKENB). When the EKSET and EKENB signals differ in their logic, the CNC reads the input key code. Once reading has been completed,
Page 129115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 Program screen display mode signal PRGDPL [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is on “1” while the CNC is displaying a program screen. Key code read completion signal EKENB [Classification] Output signal [Function] This sig
Page 1292B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE GRAPH 1 For the small keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to CUSTOM . For the standard keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to GRAPH . 0EEH is assigned to CUSTOM . 2 Handling of the soft keys [F0] to [F9], [FR], and [FL] in the key code table are the key codes for the sof
Page 129315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 MDI Key Code Table(00H-- 7FH) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 Space 0 @ P 1 1 A Q 2 2 B R 3 # 3 C S 4 4 D T 5 5 E U 6 & 6 F V 7 7 G W 8 ( 8 H X 9 ) 9 I Y A ; * J Z (EOB) B + K [ C , L D -- = M ] E . N F / ? O 1274
Page 1294B--63003EN--1/02 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION MDI Key Code Table(80H-- 0FFH) 8 9 A B C D E F 0 RESET [F0] (Note2) 1 [F1] (Note2) 2 [F2] (Note2) 3 [F3] (Note2) 4 INSERT [F4] (Note2) 5 DELETE [F5] (Note2) [F6] 6 CAN ALTER (Note2) 7 [F7] (Note2) 8 Cursor INPUT POS [F8]  (Note2) 9 Cursor PROG [F9]  (Note2
Page 129515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B--63003EN--1/02 15.6 DIRECT OPERATION BY PMC/MMC General Activating memory operation in memory operation mode (MEM) with the direct operation select signal set to 1 enables machining (direct operation) while reading a program stored in the PMC--SC or MMC. Signal Direct oper
Page 1296B--63003EN--1/02 16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO 16 INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO The following diagram shows the relationships between interface signals used among the CNC, PMC, and MACRO when a machining guidance function is implemented using the CNC macro executor. CNC MACRO P
Page 129716. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B--63003EN--1/02 16.1 SIGNALS USED BY MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION (20i--FA/TA) PMC → MACRO Coordinate origin Datum plane setup signals First--axis datum plane setup signal ORG1: Specifies a datum plane with the origin (0) set at the current value of the fir
Page 1298B--63003EN--1/02 16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO Machining guidance menu select Machining guidance menu to be signal selected GMN4 GMN3 GMN2 GMN1 GMN0 F T 0 0 0 0 0 Not selected (machining guidance menu--based machining is not per- formed) 0 0 0 0 1 Linear machining Linear machining 0 0 0
Page 129916. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B--63003EN--1/02 Feed--per--minute specification FMIN: When this signal is 1, it puts the machine tool in the feed--per--minute mode. Feed--per--revolution specification FREV: When this signal is 1, it puts the machine tool in the feed--per--revolution mode
Page 1300B--63003EN--1/02 16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO Timing of signals for specifying feed per minute and feed per revolution The following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as an example. Feed--per--minute/--revolution (1) button FMIN/FREV (feed per minute/revolution) (2) (PMC→MA
Page 130116. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B--63003EN--1/02 Teaching/playback function Teaching (cutting) TCH: When this signal is 1, it registers a cutting operation that is supposed to end at the current position in memory. Teaching (rapid traverse) RCH: When this signal is 1, it registers a rapid
Page 1302B--63003EN--1/02 16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO Playback signal timing The following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as an example. (1) When the playback button is pressed, the PMC sets the PLB signal to 1 to request MACRO to make preparation for playback execution. (2) Whe
Page 130316. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B--63003EN--1/02 MACRO → CNC Machining data setup signals These signals are used for manual handle/jog feed (linear/circular feed). Address Size Linear feed Circular feed R961 1 byte 0: Neither linear nor circular feed is performed. 1: Linear feed 2: Circul
Page 1304B--63003EN--1/02 16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO Data at R961 to R974 Reset to 0 by the macro when setting ends. R979 Set to 1 by the NC when it finishes reading. Address Size Linear feed Circular feed R980 to R963 4 bytes Distance from the current Distance from the current position to th
Page 130516. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B--63003EN--1/02 Timing of signals for machining guidance--based automatic operation The following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as an example. GMN0 to GMN4 (machining guidance menu select signal) (PMC→MACRO) GMD0 toGMD4 (machining guidance
Page 1306B--63003EN--1/02 16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO (7) When the GST becomes 0, and the mode select signal returns to the previous state, the CNC resets the mode selection configuration signal MMEM to 0 to terminate machining guidance--based automatic operation. Timing of signals for machini
Page 130716. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B--63003EN--1/02 Constant surface speed function Constant surface speed function accepted signal SSCE: When this signal is 1, it indicates that MACRO has accepted a request for constant surface speed control. Teaching function Teaching accepted signal TCE:
Page 1308B--63003EN--1/02 16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO X--axis If the CNC is the TA (--) Approach direction when the handle is rotated clockwise SIN SIN=1 SIN=1 COS=1 COS COS=0 Z--axis (--) (+) SIN=0 SIN=0 COS=1 COS=0 (+) Cutting axis Circular cutting clockwise/counterclockwise rotation: CW/CCW
Page 130916. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B--63003EN--1/02 16.2 Limit data setup signals SIGNALS USED FOR POLYGON LIMIT MACHINING (20i--FA) MACRO → PMC Address Set data R961 4: Specifies a line. 5: Specifies a limit condition. R962 to R965 Line tilt (COS° × 230) Inner datum point coordinate first a
Page 1310B--63003EN--1/02 16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO Timing of signals for polygon limit machining The following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as an example. Input end key (INSERT) MACRO (1), (2) (4) (5) Limit data write (R961 to R976) Setup change notification (R978) (3) (6)
Page 131116. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B--63003EN--1/02 (7) MACRO sets the polygon limit mode request signal (MLMRQ) to 1. On detecting that the signal is 1, the PMC sets the polygon limit enable signal (MALNT) to 1. After this, the CNC enables the polygon limit function according to the limit f
Page 1312APPENDI
Page 1313B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 1295
Page 1314A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES A.1.1 Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows: Series 16i/18i/160i/180i List of Addresses CNC G000-- PMC X000-- MT (One--path Control) F000-- Y000-- Following shows table of addresses: In an item where
Page 1315B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC MT ⌡ PMC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X000 X001 X002 X003 SKIP ESKIP --MIT2 +MIT2 --MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE (T series) X004 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 (M series) SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
Page 1316A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 PMC ⌡ CNC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 G003 G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN G005 BFIN AFL BFIN TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN G006 SKIPP OVC
Page 1317B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G025 G026 G027 CON *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1 G028 PC2SLC SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP SOR SAR GR31 GR21 G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0 G031 PKESS2 PKESS1 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I
Page 1318A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G050 *TLV9 *TLV8 G051 *CHLD CHPST *CHP8 *CHP4 *CHP2 *CHP0 G052 RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0 G053 CDZ SMZ UINT TMRON G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000 G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 U
Page 1319B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRIDB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB G077 MPOFB SLVB MORCMB G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08 G080 SHB07 S
Page 1320A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 G101 G102 --J8 --J7 --J6 --J5 --J4 --J3 --J2 --J1 G103 G104 G105 G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 G107 G108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1 G109 G110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +L
Page 1321B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1 G125 G126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 G127 G128 G129 G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G131 G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1 G133 G134 --MIT4 --MIT3 --MIT
Page 1322A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E G152 G153 G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB EFINB G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B E
Page 1323B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD EFIND G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D
Page 1324A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G199 G200 G201 G202 G203 G204 MRDYC ORCML SFRC SRVC CTH1C CTH2C TLMHC TLMLC G205 RCHC RSLC INTGC SOCNC MCFNC SPSLC *ESPC ARSTC G206 RCHHGC MFNHGC INCMDC OVRIDC DEFMDC NRROC ROTAC INDXC G207 MPOFC SLVC MORCMC G208 SHC07 SHC06 S
Page 1325B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC CNC ⌡ PMC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL F002 MDRN CUT SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH F003 MTCHIN MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH MINC F004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1 F005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 M
Page 1326A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24 F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00 F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08 F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16 F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24 F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00 F031
Page 1327B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F050 MORA2B MORA1B PORA2B SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB F051 INCSTB PC1DEB F052 F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000 F055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO00
Page 1328A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP MP2O MP1O F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O F080 *JV15O *JV14O *J
Page 1329B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F100 ZP48 ZP47 ZP46 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41 F101 F102 MV8 MV7 MV6 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1 F103 F104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1 F105 F106 MVD8 MVD7 MVD6 MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1 F107 F108 MMI8 MMI7 MMI6 MMI5 MMI4 MMI3
Page 1330A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F125 F126 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA F131 EABUFA EMFA F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB F134 EABUFB E
Page 1331B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F150 F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 ORARC TLMC LDT2C LDT1C SARC SDTC SSTC ALMC F169 MORA2C MORA1C PORA2C SLVSC RCFNC RC
Page 1332A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F175 F176 F177 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK F178 SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0 F179 F180 CLRCH8 CLRCH7 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1 F181 F182 EACNT8 EACNT7 EACNT6 EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1
Page 1333B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A.1.2 Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows: Series 16i/18i/160i/180i List of Addresses (Two--path Control) CNC G000-- PMC X000-- MT Path 1 F000-- Y000-- G1000-- Path 2 F1000-- Signals addresses for each path are usually
Page 1334A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 MT ⌡ PMC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X000 X001 X002 X003 ESKIP --MIT2 #1 +MIT2 #1 --MIT1 #1 +MIT1 #1 ZAE #1 XAE #1 SKIP #1 (T series) X004 SKIP6 #1 SKIP5 #1 SKIP4 #1 SKIP3 #1 SKIP2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1 ESKIP ZAE #1 YAE #1 XAE #1 SKIP #
Page 1335B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC PMC ⌡ CNC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G000 ED7 #1 ED6 #1 ED5 #1 ED4 #1 ED3 #1 ED2 #1 ED1 #1 ED0 #1 G001 ED15 #1 ED14 #1 ED13 #1 ED12 #1 ED11 #1 ED10 #1 ED9 #1 ED8 #1 G002 ESTB #1 EA6 #1 EA5 #1 EA4 #1 EA3 #1 EA2 #1 EA1 #1 EA0 #1 G003 G0
Page 1336A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G025 G026 G027 CON #1 *SSTP3#1 *SSTP2#1 *SSTP1#1 SWS3 #1 SWS2 #1 SWS1 #1 G028 PC2SLC#1 SPSTP#1 *SCPF#1 *SUCPF#1 GR2 #1 GR1 #1 G029 *SSTP#1 SOR #1 SAR #1 GR31 #1 GR21 #1 G030 SOV7 #1 SOV6 #1 SOV5 #1 SOV4 #1 SOV3 #1 SOV2 #1 SOV1
Page 1337B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G050 *TLV9 #1 *TLV8 #1 G051 *CHLD #1 CHPST #1 *CHP8 #1 *CHP4 #1 *CHP2 #1 *CHP0 #1 G052 G053 CDZ #1 SMZ #1 UINT #1 TMRON#1 G054 UI007 #1 UI006 #1 UI005 #1 UI004 #1 UI003 #1 UI002 #1 UI001 #1 UI000 #1 G055 UI015 #1 UI014 #1 UI01
Page 1338A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G075 RCHB#1 RSLB #1 INTGB #1 SOCNB#1 MCFNB#1 SPSLB#1 *ESPB#1 ARSTB#1 G076 RCHHGB#1 MFNHGB#1 INCMDB#1 OVRIDB#1 DEFMDB#1 NRROB#1 ROTAB#1 INDXB#1 G077 MPOFB#1 SLVB#1 MORCMB#1 G078 SHA07#1 SHA06#1 SHA05#1 SHA04#1 SHA03#1 SHA02#1 S
Page 1339B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G100 +J7#1 +J6#1 +J5#1 +J4 #1 +J3 #1 +J2 #1 +J1 #1 G101 G102 --J7 #1 --J6 #1 --J5 #1 --J4 #1 --J3 #1 --J2 #1 --J1 #1 G103 G104 G105 G106 MI7 #1 MI6 #1 MI5 #1 MI4 #1 MI3 #1 MI2 #1 MI1 #1 G107 G108 MLK7 #1 MLK6 #1 MLK5 #1 MLK4 #
Page 1340A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G124 DTCH7#1 DTCH6#1 DTCH5#1 DTCH4#1 DTCH3#1 DTCH2#1 DTCH1#1 G125 G126 SVF7 #1 SVF6 #1 SVF5 #1 SVF4 #1 SVF3 #1 SVF2 #1 SVF1 #1 G127 G128 MIX7 MIX6 MIX5 MIX4 MIX3 MIX2 MIX1 G129 G130 *IT7 #1 *IT6 #1 *IT5 #1 *IT4 #1 *IT3 #1 *IT2
Page 1341B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G149 EID31A#1 EID30A#1 EID29A#1 EID28A#1 EID27A#1 EID26A#1 EID25A#1 EID24A#1 G150 DRNE#1 RTE #1 OVCE#1 ROV2E#1 ROV1E#1 G151 *FV7E#1 *FV6E#1 *FV5E#1 *FV4E#1 *FV3E#1 *FV2E#1 *FV1E#1 *FV0E#1 G152 G153 G154 EBUFB#1 ECLRB#1 ESTPB#1
Page 1342A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 EBUFD#1 ECLRD#1 ESTPD#1 ESOFD#1 ESBKD#1 EMBUFD#1 EFIND#1 G179 EMSBKD#1 EC6D #1 EC5D #1 EC4D #1 EC3D #1 EC2D #1 EC1D #1 EC0D #1 G180 EIF7D#1 EIF6D#1 EIF5D#1 EIF4D#1 EIF3D#1 EIF2D#1 EIF1D#1 EIF0D#1 G181
Page 1343B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G199 G200 G201 G202 G203 G204 G205 G206 G207 G208 G209 G210 G211 G212 G213 G214 G215 G216 G217 G218 G219 1325
Page 1344A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 PMC ⌡ CNC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1000 ED7#2 ED6#2 ED5#2 ED4#2 ED3#2 ED2#2 ED1#2 ED0#2 G1001 ED15#2 ED14#2 ED13#2 ED12#2 ED11#2 ED10#2 ED9#2 ED8#2 G1002 ESTB#2 EA6#2 EA5#2 EA4#2 EA3#2 EA2#2 EA1#2 EA0#2 G1003 G1004 MFIN3#2 MFIN2#2
Page 1345B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1025 G1026 G1027 CON#2 *SSTP3#2 *SSTP2#2 *SSTP1#2 SWS3#2 SWS2#2 SWS1#2 G1028 PC2SLC#2 SPSTP#2 *SCPF#2 *SUCPF#2 GR2#2 GR1#2 G1029 *SSTP#2 SOR#2 SAR#2 GR31#2 GR21#2 G1030 SOV7#2 SOV6#2 SOV5#2 SOV4#2 SOV3#2 SOV2#2 SOV1#2 SOV0#2
Page 1346A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1050 *TLV9 #2 *TLV8 #2 G1051 *CHLD #2 CHPST #2 *CHP8 #2 *CHP4 #2 *CHP2 #2 *CHP0 #2 G1052 G1053 CDZ#2 SMZ#2 UINT#2 TMRON#2 G1054 UI007#2 UI006#2 UI005#2 UI004#2 UI003#2 UI002#2 UI001#2 UI000#2 G1055 UI015#2 UI014#2 UI013#2 UI0
Page 1347B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1075 RCHB#2 RSLB#2 INTGB #2 SOCNB#2 MCFNB#2 SPSLB#2 *ESPB#2 ARSTB#2 G1076 RCHHGB#2 MFNHGB#2 INCMDB#2 OVRIDB#2 DEFMDB#2 NRROB#2 ROTAB#2 INDXB#2 G1077 MPOFB#2 SLVB#2 MORCMB#2 G1078 SHA07#2 SHA06#2 SHA05#2 SHA04#2 SHA03#2 SHA02#
Page 1348A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1100 +J7#2 +J6#2 +J5#2 +J4#2 +J3#2 +J2#2 +J1#2 G1101 G1102 --J7#2 --J6#2 --J5#2 --J4#2 --J3#2 --J2#2 --J1#2 G1103 G1104 G1105 G1106 MI7#2 MI6#2 MI5#2 MI4#2 MI3#2 MI2#2 MI1#2 G1107 G1108 MLK7#2 MLK6#2 MLK5#2 MLK4#2 MLK3#2 MLK2
Page 1349B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1124 DTCH7#2 DTCH6#2 DTCH5#2 DTCH4#2 DTCH3#2 DTCH2#2 DTCH1#2 G1125 G1126 SVF7#2 SVF6#2 SVF5#2 SVF4#2 SVF3#2 SVF2#2 SVF1#2 G1127 G1128 G1129 G1130 *IT7#2 *IT6#2 *IT5#2 *IT4#2 *IT3#2 *IT2#2 *IT1#2 G1131 G1132 +MIT4 #2 +MIT3#2 +
Page 1350A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1149 EID31A#2 EID30A#2 EID29A#2 EID28A#2 EID27A#2 EID26A#2 EID25A#2 EID24A#2 G1150 DRNE#2 RTE#2 OVCE#2 ROV2E#2 ROV1E#2 G1151 *FV7E#2 *FV6E#2 *FV5E#2 *FV4E#2 *FV3E#2 *FV2E#2 *FV1E#2 *FV0E#2 G1152 G1153 G1154 EBUFB#2 ECLRB#2 ES
Page 1351B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1174 G1175 G1176 G1177 G1178 EBUFD#2 ECLRD#2 ESTPD#2 ESOFD#2 ESBKD#2 EMBUFD#2 EFIND#2 G1179 EMSBKD#2 EC6D#2 EC5D#2 EC4D#2 EC3D#2 EC2D#2 EC1D#2 EC0D#2 G1180 EIF7D#2 EIF6D#2 EIF5D#2 EIF4D#2 EIF3D#2 EIF2D#2 EIF1D#2 EIF0D#2 G1181
Page 1352A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1199 G1200 G1201 G1202 G1203 G1204 G1205 G1206 G1207 G1208 G1209 G1210 G1211 G1212 G1213 G1214 G1215 G1216 G1217 G1218 G1219 1334
Page 1353B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC CNC ⌡ PMC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 OP#1 SA#1 STL#1 SPL#1 RWD#1 F001 MA#1 TAP#1 ENB#1 DEN#1 BAL#1 RST#1 AL#1 F002 MDRN#1 CUT#1 SRNMV#1 THRD#1 CSS #1 RPDO#1 INCH#1 F003 MTCHIN#1 MEDT#1 MMEM#1 MRMT#1 MMDI#1 MJ#1 MH#1 MINC#1 F004 M
Page 1354A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F025 S31#1 S30#1 S29#1 S28#1 S27#1 S26#1 S25#1 S24#1 F026 T07#1 T06#1 T05#1 T04#1 T03#1 T02#1 T01#1 T00#1 F027 T15#1 T14#1 T13#1 T12#1 T11#1 T10#1 T09#1 T08#1 F028 T23#1 T22#1 T21#1 T20#1 T19#1 T18#1 T17#1 T16#1 F029 T31#1 T30
Page 1355B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F050 MORA2B#1 MORA1B#1 PORA2B#1 SLVSB#1 RCFNB#1 RCHPB#1 CFINB#1 CHPB#1 F051 INCSTB#1 PC1DEB#1 F052 F053 EKENB BGEACT#1 RPALM#1 RPBSY#1 PRGDPL INHKY F054 UO007#1 UO006#1 UO005#1 UO004#1 UO003#1 UO002#1 UO001#1 UO000#1 F055 UO01
Page 1356A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F075 SPO#1 KEYO#1 DRNO#1 MLKO#1 SBKO#1 BDTO#1 F076 ROV2O#1 ROV1O#1 RTAP#1 MP2O#1 MP1O#1 F077 RTO#1 HS1DO#1 HS1CO#1 HS1BO#1 HS1AO#1 F078 *FV7O#1 *FV6O#1 *FV5O#1 *FV4O#1 *FV3O#1 *FV2O#1 *FV1O#1 *FV0O#1 F079 *JV7O#1 *JV6O#1 *JV5O
Page 1357B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F100 ZP47#1 ZP46#1 ZP45#1 ZP44#1 ZP43#1 ZP42#1 ZP41#1 F101 F102 MV7#1 MV6#1 MV5#1 MV4#1 MV3#1 MV2#1 MV1#1 F103 F104 INP7#1 INP6#1 INP5#1 INP4#1 INP3#1 INP2#1 INP1#1 F105 F106 MVD7#1 MVD6#1 MVD5#1 MVD4#1 MVD3#1 MVD2#1 MVD1#1 F1
Page 1358A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F125 F126 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL#1 EOV0#1 F130 EBSYA#1 EOTNA#1 EOTPA#1 EGENA#1 EDENA#1 EIALA#1 ECKZA#1 EINPA#1 F131 EABUFA#1 EMFA#1 F132 EM28A#1 EM24A#1 EM22A#1 EM21A#1 EM18A#1 EM14A#1 EM12A#1 EM11A#1 F133 EBSYB#1 EOTNB#1 EOTPB
Page 1359B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F150 F151 EM48D#1 EM44D#1 EM42D#1 EM41D#1 EM38D#1 EM34D#1 EM32D#1 EM31D#1 F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 F169 F170 F171 F172 F173 F174 1341
Page 1360A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F175 F176 F177 EDGN#1 EPARM#1 EVAR#1 EPRG#1 EWTIO#1 ESTPIO#1 ERDIO#1 IOLNK#1 F178 SRLNO3#1 SRLNO2#1 SRLNO1#1 SRLNO0#1 F179 F180 CLRCH8#1 CLRCH7#1 CLRCH6#1 CLRCH5#1 CLRCH4#1 CLRCH3#1 CLRCH2#1 CLRCH1#1 F181 F182 EACNT7#1 EACNT6#
Page 1361B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC PMC ⌡ CNC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1000 OP#2 SA#2 STL#2 SPL#2 RWD#2 F1001 MA#2 TAP#2 ENB#2 DEN#2 BAL#2 RST#2 AL#2 F1002 MDRN#2 CUT#2 SRNMV#2 THRD#2 CSS #2 RPDO#2 INCH#2 F1003 MTCHIN#2 MEDT#2 MMEM#2 MRMT#2 MMDI#2 MJ#2 MH#2 MINC#2 F1
Page 1362A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1025 S31#2 S30#2 S29#2 S28#2 S27#2 S26#2 S25#2 S24#2 F1026 T07#2 T06#2 T05#2 T04#2 T03#2 T02#2 T01#2 T00#2 F1027 T15#2 T14#2 T13#2 T12#2 T11#2 T10#2 T09#2 T08#2 F1028 T23#2 T22#2 T21#2 T20#2 T19#2 T18#2 T17#2 T16#2 F1029 T31#
Page 1363B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1050 MORA2B#2 MORA1B#2 PORA2B#2 SLVSB#2 RCFNB#2 RCHPB#2 CFINB#2 CHPB#2 F051 INCSTB#2 PC1DEB#2 F1052 F1053 BGEACT#2 RPALM#2 RPBSY#2 F1054 UO007#2 UO006#2 UO005#2 UO004#2 UO003#2 UO002#2 UO001#2 UO000#2 F1055 UO015#2 UO014#2 UO
Page 1364A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1075 SPO#2 KEYO#2 DRNO#2 MLKO#2 SBKO#2 BDTO#2 F1076 ROV2O#2 ROV1O#2 RTAP#2 MP2O#2 MP1O#2 F1077 RTO#2 HS1DO#2 HS1CO#2 HS1BO#2 HS1AO#2 F1078 *FV7O#2 *FV6O#2 *FV5O#2 *FV4O#2 *FV3O#2 *FV2O#2 *FV1O#2 *FV0O#2 F1079 *JV7O#2 *JV6O#2
Page 1365B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1100 ZP47#2 ZP46#2 ZP45#2 ZP44#2 ZP43#2 ZP42#2 ZP41#2 F1101 F1102 MV7#2 MV6#2 MV5#2 MV4#2 MV3#2 MV2#2 MV1#2 F1103 F1104 INP7#2 INP6#2 INP5#2 INP4#2 INP3#2 INP2#2 INP1#2 F1105 F1106 MVD7#2 MVD6#2 MVD5#2 MVD4#2 MVD3#2 MVD2#2 MV
Page 1366A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1125 F1126 F1127 F1128 F1129 *EAXSL#2 EOV0#2 F1130 EBSYA#2 EOTNA#2 EOTP#2 EGENA#2 EDENA#2 EIALA#2 ECKZA#2 EINPA#2 F1131 EABUFA#2 EMFA#2 F1132 EM28A#2 EM24A#2 EM22A#2 EM21A#2 EM18A#2 EM14A#2 EM12A#2 EM11A#2 F1133 EBSYB#2 EOTNB
Page 1367B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1150 F1151 EM48D#2 EM44D#2 EM42D#2 EM41D#2 EM38D#2 EM34D#2 EM32D#2 EM31D#2 F1152 F1153 F1154 F1155 F1156 F1157 F1158 F1159 F1160 F1161 F1162 F1163 F1164 F1165 F1166 F1167 F1168 F1169 F1170 F1171 F1172 F1173 F1174 1349
Page 1368A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1175 F1176 F1177 EDGN#2 EPARM#2 EVAR#2 EPRG#2 EWTIO#2 ESTPIO#2 ERDIO#2 IOLNK#2 F1178 SRLNO3#2 SRLNO2#2 SRLNO1#2 SRLNO0#2 F1179 F1180 CLRCH8#2 CLRCH7#2 CLRCH6#2 CLRCH5#2 CLRCH4#2 CLRCH3#2 CLRCH2#2 CLRCH1#2 F1181 F1182 EACNT7#2
Page 1369B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A.1.3 The figure below illustrates the addresses of interface signals between the Series 21i/210i CNC and PMC. Address List CNC G000  PMC X000  MT F000  Y000  Following shows table of addresses: In an item where both T series and M series are des
Page 1370A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 D T series/M series PMC ⌡ CNC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 G003 G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN G005 BFIN AFL BFIN TFIN SFIN EFIN
Page 1371B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G025 G026 G027 CON *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1 G028 PC2SLC SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP SOR SAR GR31 GR21 G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0 G031 PKESS2 PKESS1 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I
Page 1372A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G050 *TLV9 *TLV8 G051 G052 RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0 G053 CDZ SMZ UINT TMRON G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000 G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008 G056 G057 G05
Page 1373B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRIDB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB G077 MPOFB SLVB MORCMB G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08 G080 SHB07 S
Page 1374A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G100 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 G101 G102 --J4 --J3 --J2 --J1 G103 G104 G105 G106 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 G107 G108 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1 G109 G110 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1 G111 G112 --LM4 --LM3 --LM2 --LM1 G113 G114 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 G115 G116 *--L4
Page 1375B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G124 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1 G125 G126 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 G127 G128 G129 G130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G131 G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1 G133 G134 --MIT4 --MIT3 --MIT2 --MIT1 G135 G136 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1 G137 G138 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYN
Page 1376A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E G152 G153 G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB EFINB G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B E
Page 1377B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD EFIND G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D
Page 1378A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G199 G200 G201 G202 G203 G204 G205 G206 G207 G208 G209 G210 G211 G212 G213 G214 G215 G216 G217 G218 G219 G220 G221 G222 1360
Page 1379B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC CNC ⌡ PMC Address Bit number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL F002 MDRN CUT SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH F003 MTCHIN MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH MINC F004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1 F005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 M
Page 1380A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24 F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00 F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08 F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16 F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24 F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00 F031
Page 1381B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F050 MORA2B MORA1B PORA2B SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB F051 INCSTB PC1DEB F052 F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000 F055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO00
Page 1382A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP MP2O MP1O F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O F080 *JV15O *JV14O *J
Page 1383B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F100 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41 F101 F102 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1 F103 F104 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1 F105 F106 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1 F107 F108 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2 MMI1 F109 F110 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1 F111 F112 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1 F113 F114
Page 1384A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F125 F126 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA F131 EABUFA EMFA F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB F134 EABUFB E
Page 1385B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F150 F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 F169 F170 F171 F172 F173 F174 1367
Page 1386A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F175 F176 F177 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK F178 SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0 F179 F180 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1 F181 F182 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1 F183 F184 F185 F186 F187 F188 F189 F190 F191 F192 F193 F
Page 1387B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A.1.4 The following dialog shows the relationships between the addresses for Series 20i Address List the interface signals between the CNC and PMC. CNC G000  PMC X000  MT F000  Y000  If a signal in an item common to both T and F series is disable
Page 1388A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 D T series/F series PMC ⌡ CNC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 G003 G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN G005 AFL TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN G006 SKIPP O
Page 1389B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G025 G026 G027 G028 GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP SOR SAR G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0 G031 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I G034 G035 G036 G037 G038 G039 G040 G041 HS2ID HS2IC H
Page 1390A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G050 G051 G052 RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0 G053 CDZ SMZ TMRON G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000 G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008 G056 G057 G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD MINP G0
Page 1391B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G075 G076 G077 G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08 G080 G081 G082 G083 G084 G085 G086 --Ja +Ja --Jg +Jg G087 MP42 MP41 MP32 MP31 MP22 MP21 G088 HS4ID HS4IC HS4IB HS4IA G089 G090 G091 SRLNI
Page 1392A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G100 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 G101 G102 --J4 --J3 --J2 --J1 G103 G104 G105 G106 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 G107 G108 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1 G109 G110 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1 G111 G112 --LM4 --LM3 --LM2 --LM1 G113 G114 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 G115 G116 *--L4 *--L3 *
Page 1393B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G124 G125 G126 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 G127 G128 G129 G130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G131 G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1 G133 G134 --MIT4 --MIT3 --MIT2 --MIT1 G135 G136 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1 G137 G138 G139 G140 G141 G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESB
Page 1394A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E G152 G153 G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB EFINB G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B
Page 1395B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD EFIND G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D G182 EI
Page 1396A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G199 G200 G201 G202 G203 G204 G205 G206 G207 G208 G209 G210 G211 G212 G213 G214 G215 G216 G217 G218 G219 G220 G221 G222 1378
Page 1397B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC CNC ⌡ PMC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL F002 MDRN CUT SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH F003 MTCHIN MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH F004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1 F005 F006 F007 TF SF EFD MF F008 MF3
Page 1398A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24 F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00 F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08 F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16 F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24 F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00 F031 B15 B14
Page 1399B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F050 F051 F052 F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000 F055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO008 F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100 F057 UO115 UO114
Page 1400A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP MP2O MP1O F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV
Page 1401B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F100 F101 F102 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1 F103 F104 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1 F105 F106 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1 F107 F108 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2 MMI1 F109 F110 F111 F112 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1 F113 F114 TRQL2 TRQL1 F115 F116 F117 F118 F119 F120 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF
Page 1402A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F125 F126 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA F131 EABUFA EMFA F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB F134 EABUFB EMFB F135
Page 1403B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F150 F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 F169 F170 F171 F172 F173 F174 1385
Page 1404A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F175 F176 F177 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK F178 SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0 F179 F180 F181 F182 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1 F183 F184 F185 F186 F187 F188 F189 F190 F191 F192 F193 F194 F195 1386
Page 1405B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A.2 SIGNAL SUMMARY A.2.1 Signal Summary f : Available F : Available only with (In Order of Functions) 2--path control -- : Unavailable T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Power Mate background operation signal BGEN G092#4 f
Page 1406A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Alarm signal AL F001#0 f f Alarm signal 24 2.4 Battery alarm signal BAL F001#2 f f Servo axis abnormal load detected ABTQSV F090#0 f f signal First--spindle abnormal load detected signal A
Page 1407B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Data signals for external data input ED0 to ED15 G000, G001 f f Address signals for external data input EA0 to EA6 G002#0 to #6 f f Read signal for external data input ESTB G002#7 f f E t
Page 1408A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Tool change signal TLCH F064#0 f f Tool change reset signal TLRST G048#7 f f Individual tool change signal TLCHI F064#2 — f Individual tool change reset signal TLRST IG048#6 — f Tool skip
Page 1409B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series High--speed skip signal High--speed skip status signals HDO0 to HDO7 F122 f f 14.3.2 Canned cycle (M series)/canned cycle for hole Tapping signal TAP F001#5 f f 11.7 machining (T series) S
Page 1410A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Polygon spindle stop signal *PLSST G038#0 f — Spindle polygon speed reached signal PSAR F063#2 f — Polygonal turning with two spindles Master axis not reached signal PSE1 F063#0 f — 6.10.2
Page 1411B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series SOCNA G071#4 f f Soft start/stop cancel signals SOCNB G075#4 f f (serial spindle) SOCNC G205#4 f f INTGA G071#5 f f Speed integral signals (serial spindle) INTGB G075#5 f f INTGC G205#5 f
Page 1412A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series SLVA G073#1 f f Subordinate operation mode command SLVB G077#1 f f signals (serial spindle) SLVC G207#1 f f MPOFA G073#2 f f Motor power cutoff command signals MPOFB G077#2 f f (serial spi
Page 1413B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series RCFNA F046#3 f f Output switch completion signals RCFNB F050#3 f f (serial spindle) RCFNC F169#3 f f SLVSA F046#4 f f Subordinate operation status signals SLVSB F050#4 f f (serial spindle)
Page 1414A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Manual Feed axis and direction selection linear/circular signals +Jg, --Jg, +Ja, --Ja G086#0 to #3 f f 3.5 interpolation HS1A to HS1D G018#0 to #3 f f Manual handle feed axis selection HS2
Page 1415B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Start lock signal STLK G007#1 f — Interlock signal *IT G008#0 f f Interlock signal for each axis *IT1 to *IT8 G130 f f Manual feed interlock signal for each +MIT1, +MIT2 X004#2, #4 f — Sta
Page 1416A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Software operator’s panel signal ROV1O F076#4 f f (ROV1) Software operator’s panel signal ROV2O F076#5 f f (ROV2) Software operator’s panel signal (BDT) BDTO F075#2 f f Software operator’s
Page 1417B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Synchronous control axis selection SYNC1 to SYNC8 G138 f — signals Parking signals PK1 to PK8 G122 f — 18 1.8 Synchronous control under way signals SYN10 to SYN80 F118 f — Synchronous cont
Page 1418A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series EBUFA G142#7 f f Axis control command read signals EBUFB G154#7 f f (PMC axis control) EBUFC G166#7 f f EBUFD G178#7 f f EID0A to EID31A G146 to G149 f f Axis control data signals EID0B to
Page 1419B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series EFINA G142#0 f f Auxiliary function completion signals EFINB G154#0 f f (PMC axis control) EFINC G166#0 f f EFIND G178#0 f f ESOFA G142#4 f f ESOFB G154#4 f f Servo off signals (PMC axis c
Page 1420A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series EOTPA F130#5 f f Positive -direction Positive- direction overtravel signals EOTPB F133#5 f f (PMC axis control) EOTPC F136#5 f f EOTPD F139#5 f f Feedrate override signals (PMC axis *FV0E
Page 1421B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Floating reference Floating reference position return end position return signals FRP1 to FRP8 F116 f f 4.6 Program restart signal SRN G006#0 f f Program restart 57 5.7 Program restart und
Page 1422A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series 2nd position coder selection signal PC2SLC G028#7 f — Multi--spindle control (T series) ENB2 F038#2 f — 9.10 Spindle enable signals ENB3 F038#3 f — Mirror image signals MI1 to MI8 G106 f f
Page 1423B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A.2.2 List of Signals f : Available F : Available only with (In Order of Symbols) 2--path control -- : Unavailable T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item *+ED1 to *+ED8 External deceleration signal G118 f f 7.1.9 *+L1 to *
Page 1424A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item *SCPF Spindle clamp completion signal G028#5 f - 9.8 *SP Feed hold signal G008#5 f f 5.1 *SSTP Spindle stop signal G029#6 f f 9.3 *SSTP1 G027#3 f - *SSTP2 Stop signal in each spindle
Page 1425B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item B00 to B31 2nd auxiliary function code signal F030 to F033 f f 8.1 BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2 f f 2.4 BCLP B--- axis clamp signal F061#1 - f 11.11 BDT1,BDT2 to BDT9 Optional bloc
Page 1426A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item DEFMDA G072#3 f f DEFMDB Differential mode command signal (serial spindle) G076#3 f f 9.2, 9.15 DEFMDC G206#3 f f DEN Distribution end signal F001#3 f f 8.1 DM00 F009#7 f f DM01 F009#
Page 1427B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item EBUFA G142#7 f f EBUFB Axis control command read signal(PMC axis G154#7 f f 15 1 15.1 EBUFC control) G166#7 f f EBUFD G178#7 f f EC0A to EC6A G143#0 to #6 f f EC0B to EC6B G155#0 to #
Page 1428A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item EID0A to EID31A G146 to G149 f f EID0B to EID31B G158 to G161 f f Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) 15 1 15.1 EID0C to EID31C G170 to G173 f f EID0D to EID31D G182 to G185 f
Page 1429B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item EOTNA F130#6 f f EOTNB Negative direction overtravel signal (PMC axis Negative--- F133#6 f f 15 1 15.1 EOTNC control) F136#6 f f EOTND F139#6 f f EOTPA F130#5 f f EOTPB Positive direc
Page 1430A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item F1D F1--- digit feed select signal G016#7 - f 7.1.5 FEED0 Feed zero signal F066#2 f f 3.8 FIN Completion signal G004#3 f f 8.1 FRP1 to FRP8 Floating reference position return end sign
Page 1431B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item IGNVRY All--- axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal G066#0 f f 2.9 IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 Each--- axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal G192 f f 2.9 INCH Inch input signal F002#0 f f 11.4 INCMDA G0
Page 1432A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item MCFNA G071#3 f f MCFNB Power line switch completion signal (serial spindle) G075#3 f f 9.2, 9.15 MCFNC G205#3 f f MD1,MD2,MD4 Mode selection signal G043#0 to #2 f f 2.6 MD1O Software
Page 1433B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item MMLK All--- axis machine lock check signal F004#1 f f 5.3.1 MORA1A F046#6 f f MORA1B Signal for completion of spindle orientation with a F050#6 f f 9.2, 9.15 magnetic sensor (serial s
Page 1434A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item G039#0 to OFN0 to OFN5,OFN6 Tool offset number select signal f - 14.4.2 #5,G040#0 OP Automatic operation signal F000#7 f f 5.1 ORARA F045#7 f f ORARB Orientation completion signal (se
Page 1435B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item PSE1 Master axis not arrival signal F063#0 f - 6.10.2 PSE2 Polygon synchronous axis not arrival signal F063#1 f - 6.10.2 P F070#0 to PSW01 to PSW10 Position switch signal f f 1.2.9 F0
Page 1436A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item ROV1E,ROV2E Rapid traverse override signal(PMC axis control) G150#0,#1 f f 15.1 ROV1O Software operator’s panel signal(ROV1) F076#4 f f 12.1.15 ROV2O Software operator’s panel signal(
Page 1437B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item SF Spindle speed strobe signal F007#2 f f 8.1 SFIN Spindle function completion signal G005#2 f f 8.4 SFRA G070#5 f f SFRB CW command signal (serial spindle) G074#5 f f 9.2, 9.15 SFRC
Page 1438A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item SPO Software operator’s panel signal(*SP) F075#7 f f 12.1.15 SPPHS Spindle phase synchronous control signal G038#3 f f 9.12 SPSLA G071#2 f f SPSLB Spindle select signal (serial spindl
Page 1439B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item Synchronous/composite/superimposed control SYN1O to SYN7O F118#0 to #6 F - 1.9 under way signals SYNC1 to SYNC8 Simple synchronous axis select signal G138 f f 1.6 S SYNC to SYNC8 Sync
Page 1440A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Group Symbol Signal name Address Referen series series ce item UI000 to UI015 Input signal for custom macro G054,G055 f f 11.6.1 UINT Interrupt signal for custom macro G053#3 f f 11.6.2 U UO000 to UO015 F054,F055 f f Output signal for custom macr
Page 1441B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A.2.3 List of Signals f : Available : Available only with (In Order of Addresses) F 2--path control -- : Unavailable T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item X004#0 XAE f f X004#1 YAE - f Measuring position reached signal 14 2 14.
Page 1442A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G006#6 Skip signal SKIPP f - 14.3.1 G007#0 Retrace signal RVS - f 11.15 G007#1 Start lock signal STLK f - 2.5 G007#2 Cycle start signal ST f f 5.1 G007#4 Stroke check 3 release signal RLSOT
Page 1443B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G028#4 Spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPF f - 9.8 G028#5 Spindle clamp completion signal *SCPF f - 9.8 G028#6 Spindle stop complete signal SPSTP f - 9.8 G028#7 2nd position coder sele
Page 1444A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G043#5 DNC operation select signal DNCI f f 5.11 G043#7 Manual reference position return selection signal ZRN f f 4.1 BDT1, BDT2 to G044#0,G045 Optional block skip signal f f 5.5 BDT9 G044#
Page 1445B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G064#0 Retry start signal RTNCY -- f 5.13 G064#1 Retry point selection signal SLCSEQ -- f 5.13 G064#2,#3 Spindle feedback select signal SLPCA,SLPCB F - 9.4 G064#6 Simple spindle synchronous
Page 1446A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G074#1 Torque limit command HIGH signal (serial spindle) TLMHB f f 9.2 G074#3,#2 Clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1B,CTH2B f f 9.2 G074#4 CCW command signal (serial spindle) SRVB f f
Page 1447B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G092#2 Power Mate read/write inprogress signal BGION f f 13.8 G092#3 Power Mate read/write alarm signal BGIALM f f 13.8 G092#4 Power Mate background busy signal BGEN f f 13.8 G096#0 to #6 1
Page 1448A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G143#0 to #6 Axis control command signal (PMC axis control) EC0A to EC6A f f 15.1 G143#7 Block stop disable signal (PMC axis control) EMSBKA f f 15.1 G144,G145 Axis control feedrate signal
Page 1449B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G179#0 to #6 Axis control command signal (PMC axis control) EC0D to EC6D f f 15.1 G179#7 Block stop disable signal (PMC axis control) EMSBKD f f 15.1 G180,G181 Axis control feedrate signal
Page 1450A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F000#4 Feed hold lamp signal SPL f f 5.1 F000#5 Cycle start lamp signal STL f f 5.1 F000#6 Servo ready completion signal SA f f 2.2 F000#7 Automatic operation signal OP f f 5.1 F001#0 Alarm
Page 1451B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F008#0 External operation signal EF - f 11.8 F008#4 2nd M function strobe signal MF2 f f 8.3 F008#5 3rd M function strobe signal MF3 f f 8.3 F009#4 DM30 f f F009#5 DM02 f f Decode M signal
Page 1452A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F046#2 Output switch signal (serial spindle) RCHPA f f 9.2 F046#3 Output switch completion signal (serial spindle) RCFNA f f 9.2 F046#4 Slave operation status signal (serial spindle) SLVSA
Page 1453B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F054,F055 UO000 to UO015 f f Output signal for custom macro 11 6 1 11.6.1 F056 to F059 UO100 to UO131 f f F060#0 Read completion signal for external data input EREND f f 15.2 F060#1 Search
Page 1454A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F075#4 Software operator’s panel signal (MLK) MLKO f f 12.1.15 F075#5 Software operator’s panel signal (DRN) DRNO f f 12.1.15 F075#6 Software operator’s panel signal (KEY1 to KEY4) KEYO f f
Page 1455B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F116 Floating reference position return end signal FRP1 to FRP8 f f 4.6 F118 Synchronous control under way signals SYN1O to SYN8O f - 1.8 Synchronous/composite/superimposed control under wa
Page 1456A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B--63003EN--1/02 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item Axis control command read completion signal (PMC axis F136#7 EBSYC f f 15.1 control) F137#0 Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) EMFC f f 15.1 F137#1 Buffer full signal (PMC
Page 1457B--63003EN--1/02 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F177#2 Slave read/write stop signal ESTPIO f f 13.8 F177#3 Slave external write start signal EWTIO f f 13.8 F177#4 Slave program selection signal EPRG f f 13.8 F177#5 Slave macro variable s
Page 1458B--63003EN--1/02 Index Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 696 / Volume 2 : Page 697 and later Clock function, 1027 ≪Numbers≫ CNC ready signal, 226 2nd reference position return/3rd, 4th reference position return, 384 Command format, 822 Composite control, 124 Connection among spindle, spindle motor, and pos
Page 1459INDEX B--63003EN--1/02 Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 696 / Volume 2 : Page 697 and later Emergency stop, 223 Helical interpolation B (M series), 517 Entering compensation values, 1185 Help function, 1030 Erase screen display/automatic erase screen display, 1073 High speed cycle cutting, 945 Error compe
Page 1460B--63003EN--1/02 INDEX Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 696 / Volume 2 : Page 697 and later Linear interpolation, 455 Notes on interface with the PMC, 832 Linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks, 397 NURBS interpolation (M series), 521 List of addresses, 1296 List of signals, 1387 List of si
Page 1461INDEX B--63003EN--1/02 Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 696 / Volume 2 : Page 697 and later Reference position establishment, 357 Simple spindle synchronous control, 891 Reference position return, 381 Simple synchronous control, 80 Reference position return and its check during synchronous Simultaneous in
Page 1462B--63003EN--1/02 INDEX Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 696 / Volume 2 : Page 697 and later Thread cutting, 465 Torque limit skip, 1178 Thread cutting cycle retract (T series), 472 Touch pad, 1076 Three-- dimensional coordinate conversion (M series), 1004 Troubleshooting, 163 Three-- spindle serial output
Page 1463Revision Record FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is--MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B--63003EN--1) 02 Sep., ’99 Addition of Series 20i--A 01 Apr., ’97 Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents
Page 1464TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No. TMN01/013E Date : . , 2001 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of Single Direction Positioning Function 1. Communicate this report to: Your information only ○ GE
Page 1465FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of Single Direction Positioning Function 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A Name CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec.No./Ed. B-63003EN-1/02 2.
Page 14666.5 Single Direction Positioning Function • General For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final positioning from one direction is available. Overrun distance Start position Start position Temporary stop End position + When the positioning direction is minus • Format G60 P_
Page 1467• Summary of motion When the non-linear positioning is used (PRM No.1401#1 LRP=0) X Overrun(Z-axis) Overrun(X-axis) End position Z Start position The axes are positioned independently from start point by single direction positioning as follows. When the linear positioning is used (PRM No.1401#1 LRP=
Page 1468• Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5431 PDI MDL [Data type] Bit #0 MDL Specifies whether the G code for single direction positioning (G60) is included in one-shot G codes (00 group) or modal G codes (01 group) 0: One-shot G codes (00 group) 1: Modal G codes (01 group) #1 PDI When the tool is stoppe
Page 1469• Notice 1. Single direction positioning is not performed in an axis for which an overrun has not been set by the parameter (No.5440). 2. When the move distance 0 is commanded, the single direction positioning is not performed. 3. The mirror image does not influence direction set by the parameter..
Page 1470• In case the tan value of the inclination angle is plus. (parameter No.8201=1º~89º or 181º~269º) Please set the opposite direction between the angular axis (Y) and the perpendicular axis (X) into the direction of the single direction positioning. If the positioning direction of the perpendicular ax
Page 1471• In case the tan value of the inclination angle is minus. (parameter No.8201=91º~179º or 271º~359º) Please set the same direction between the angular axis (Y) and the perpendicular axis (X) into the direction of the single direction positioning. If the positioning direction of the perpendicular axi
Page 1472TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No.TMN 01/029E Date : Feb. 26, 2001 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of Tool Offset Pairs (400 pairs) and Tool Offset Pairs (999 pairs) 1. Communicate this report
Page 1473FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of Tool Offset Pairs (400 pairs) and Tool Offset Pairs (999 pairs) 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A Name CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec
Page 1474FANUC Series 16i/18i-TA Tool Offset Pairs (400) Tool Offset Pairs (999) < Contents > 1. Outline ............................................................................................................................ 3 2. Display Example...........................................................
Page 14751. Outline This function enhances the maximum number of tool offset to 400 or 999. The tool offset number is specified with the last three digits in T-code value. The tool offset number is specified with the remaining digits after excluding the three digits used to specify the tool offset number. Wh
Page 14763. System Variables (Custom Macro) System variables can be used to read and write tool compensation values. System variables for 999 tool compensation values are as follows. Compensation Wear Geometry number X-axis 1 #10001 #15001 compensation : : : values 999 #10999 #15999 Z-axis 1 #11001 #16001 co
Page 14774. Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B In the input of tool offset value measured B function, OFN0 to OFN5(G0039#0 to #5) and OFN6 to OFN9(G0040#0 to #3) are used for the tool offset number select signal. Moreover, the parameter No.5020 and No.5053 are invalid. Use the parameter No. 5023 and No.50
Page 1478< Signal > G039 OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0 G040 OFN9 OFN8 OFN7 OFN6 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the tool offset number. [Operation] When the mode for writing tool compensation is selected, the cursor is automatically positioned on the tool geometry compensation number selecte
Page 14795. Tool Life Management 5.1 T code for registering tools T-code for registering tools consists of eight digits or less when the tool offset 400 pairs or 999 pairs is available. And the last three digits is used as the tool offset number. T Tool offset number Tool selection number (Notes) When this f
Page 14805.3 Specifying a Tool Group is a Machining Program The tool group is specified as follows when the tool offset 400 pairs or 999 pairs is available. T△△999 …… End the tool used by now, and starts to use the tool of the △△group. "999" distinguishes this specification from ordinary specification. T△△88
Page 14818. Notes • The tool offset 400 pairs and 999 pairs are optional functions. • The function codes, which have relation to the tool life management in PMC window functions, cannot be used Function code ñ 160､163 ∼ 173, 200 ∼ 202 227 ∼ 231, 324 ∼ 328 • The Focas1 Library and the Basic Operation Package
Page 1482TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 01/ 043E Date Mar. 23, 2001 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Addition of “Absolute position detector battery low / zero voltage alarm signal” 1. Communicate this report to : ○ Your inform
Page 1483FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Addition of “Absolute position detector battery low / zero voltage alarm signal” 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No.
Page 14841 Application This report is applied to following CNCs. Series 16i/160i - MODEL A Series 18i/180i - MODEL A Series 21i/210i - MODEL A Series 20i - MODEL A This report is a supplement for a following manual. FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63003EN
Page 14853 Details The following explanation is added to “1.4.2 Absolute Position Detection”. Absolute position detector battery low voltage alarm signal PBATL [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the user that the battery for the absolute position detector, which retains the machine p
Page 1486TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 01/060E Date Apr. 12, 2001 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Modification of “Linear interpolation type positioning” 1. Communicate this report to : ¤ Your information ¤ GE Fanuc-N
Page 1487FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Modification of “Linear interpolation type positioning” 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No. / B-63003EN-1/02 Version
Page 14881 Application This report is applied to following CNCs. Series 16i/160i - MODEL A Series 18i/180i - MODEL A Series 21i/210i - MODEL A Series 20i - MODEL A This report is a supplement for a following manual. FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63003EN
Page 1489TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 01/116E General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i21i/20i/160i/18i/210i-MODEL A DESCRIPTIONS CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of Look-Ahead Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration Before Interpolation Time Constant Change Function 1.
Page 1490FANUC Series 16/18/160/180 - MODEL C CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Modification of “Linear interpolation type positioning” 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16/18/160/180 - MODEL C CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No. / B-62753EN-1/01 Version 2. Summary of change Group Name /
Page 14911 Application This report is applied to following CNCs. Series 16/160 - MODEL C Series 18/180 - MODEL C This report is a supplement for a following manual. FANUC Series 16/18/160/180 - MODEL C CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-62753EN-1/01) 2 Outline In the above-mentioned manuals, the explanation of
Page 1492FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A DESCRIPTIONS Concerning the addition of Look-Ahead Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration Before Interpolation Time Constant Change Function 1.Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A DESCRIPTIONS
Page 1493Look-ahead Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration Before Interpolation Time Constant Change Function (M Series) General In Look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the speed during acceleration/deceleration is as shown in the figure below. Linear Speed acceleration/decel
Page 1494Linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching specified acceleration/deceleration Speed Specified speed Time T1 T1 T2 Fig. 2 If linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching the specified acceleration occurs in AI contour control (AICC) mode or AI Nano contour control (AI nanoCC) mode or AI High Pre
Page 1495Speed Non-linear acceleration/deceleration Specified speed Time T1' T2' T2' Fig. 3 FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A DESCRIPTIONS TITLE Concerning the addition of Look-Ahead Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration Before Interpolation Time Constant Change Function 01 01.08.29 Newly R
Page 1496FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of Look-Ahead Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration Before Interpolation Time Constant Change Function 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A Na
Page 1497Look-ahead Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration Before Interpolation Time Constant Change Function (M Series) General In Look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the speed during acceleration/deceleration is as shown in the figure below. Linear Speed acceleration/decel
Page 1498Linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching specified acceleration/deceleration Speed Specified speed Time T1 T1 T2 Fig. 2 If linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching the specified acceleration occurs in AI contour control (AICC) mode or AI Nano contour control (AI nanoCC) mode or AI High Pre
Page 1499Speed Non-linear acceleration/deceleration Specified speed Time T1' T2' T2' Fig. 3 Description ・Methods of specifying the acceleration/deceleration reference speed The acceleration/deceleration reference speed is the feedrate used as the reference for calculating optimum acceleration. In Fig. 3, it
Page 1500cleared upon a reset or after the power is turned off and then on again, the acceleration/deceleration reference speed specified for parameter No. 7066 (AICC or AI nanoCC) or No.19520 (AI-HPCC or AI-nanoHPCC) will be used. (Method (2), described later) If the acceleration/deceleration reference spee
Page 1501(3)Using the speed specified with the F command issued at the start of cutting as the reference speed The speed specified with the F command issued when a cutting block group (such as G01 and G02) starts is assumed the acceleration/deceleration reference speed, This method is used if the G05.1Q1 blo
Page 1502(2) A proper acceleration is determined under the condition that the acceleration change must be about the same as the setting so that parameter changes do not cause considerable shock to the machine, that is: Acceleration after change Acceleration before change = Acceleration change time Accelerati
Page 15037066 Acceleration/deceleration reference speed for the bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant change function in AI Contour control mode or AI Nano contour control mode [Input section] Parameter input [Data type] 2 word [Unit of data] [Minimum data unit] Increment system Unit of data Va
Page 150419520 Acceleration/deceleration reference speed for the bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant change function in AI High Precision Contour control mode or AI Nano High Precision contour control mode [Input section] Parameter input [Data type] 2 word [Unit of data] [Minimum data unit] I
Page 1505TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 01/117 Date Aug. 29, 2001 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16/18/160/180 - MODEL C FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Changing of “In-position check” specification 1. Communicate this report to : Your in
Page 1506FANUC Series 16/18/160/180 - MODEL C CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Changing of “In-position check” specification 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16/18/160/180 - MODEL C CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No. / B-62753EN-1/01 Version 2. Summary of change Group Name / Outline N
Page 15071 Application This report is applied to following CNCs. Series 16/160 - MODEL C Series 18/180 - MODEL C This report is a supplement for a following manual. FANUC Series 16/18/160/180 - MODEL C CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-62753EN-1/01) 2 Outline In the above-mentioned manuals, the specification o
Page 1508FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Changing of “In-position check” specification 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No. / B-63003EN-1/02 Version 2. Summary of cha
Page 15091 Application This report is applied to following CNCs. Series 16i/160i - MODEL A Series 18i/180i - MODEL A Series 21i/210i - MODEL A This report is a supplement for a following manual. FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63003EN-1/02) 2 Outline In the a
Page 1510FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of Optimum Torque acceleration/deceleration 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A Name CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec.No./Ed. B-63003EN-1/02
Page 1511Optimum Torque acceleration/deceleration (M Series) General This function enables acceleration/deceleration in accordance with the torque characteristics of the motor and the characteristics of the machines due to its friction and gravity and performs linear type positioning with optimum acceleratio
Page 1512Description Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration selects the acceleration pattern set with parameters on the basis of the axial movement direction and the acceleration/deceleration state, determines the acceleration for each axis from the current speed, and controls the tangential acceleration/d
Page 1513- Cases in which optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled In case that optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled, acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse will be after-interpolation acceleration/deceleration or before interpolation acceleration/deceleration. When the comm
Page 1514For example, while the speed is between Fa and Fb in the previous figure, the acceleration is calculated with Aa and Ab. Tangential acceleration is controlled not to exceed the calculated acceleration for each axis. Table. (b) Parameters for acceleration pattern Accelera Speed Acceleration parameter
Page 1515- Example of setting acceleration pattern data In this example, the machine is equipped with the αM30/4000i . Motor speed at rapid traverse is 3000 (min-1). 120 Torque(Nm 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 -1 Speed(m in ) Fig. (d) Speed-torque characteristics of model M30/4000i Specifications
Page 1516Let the torque be x (Nm), the inertia be y(Kgm2), and the ball screw pitch p(mm), then the acceleration A is calculated as follows: x[ N Em] p x([kg Em / sec2 ][m]) p A= × [mm] = × [mm] y[kg Em 2 ] 2ƒÎ y[kg Em 2 ] 2ƒÎ x× p = [mm / sec2 ] 2ƒÎ× y Machine specification is assumed as follows, Ball screw
Page 1517Parameter Setting Unit Remarks No. Acceler 19546,19552 18712 0.01 At P1, 90(Nm) can be used for the ation at 19558,19564 % acceleration/deceleration, so set the 2 P1 ratio 7717 (mm/sec ) to 4124 2 (mm/sec ). 1.8712 = 7717/4124 Acceler 19547-19549 0 0.01 0 is set because P2 to P4 are ation at 19553-1
Page 1518- Examples of setting if the acceleration pattern differs depending on whether acceleration or deceleration is in progress and whether the movement is in the minus or plus direction From the effect of gravity and friction, torque for acceleration/deceleration is different on each condition, such as
Page 1519(1) In case of plus move (up) and acceleration Because torque of Gravity and friction work against the output torque of motor, the torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 70(=100-20-10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1) Torque at rapid traverse : 49(=79-20-10) (Nm) Speed: 30
Page 1520(2) In case of plus move (up) and deceleration Because torque of Gravity and friction work forward to the output torque of motor, the torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 130(=100+20+10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1) Torque at rapid traverse : 109(=79+20+10) (Nm) Spee
Page 1521(3) In case of minus move (down) and acceleration Because torque of Gravity works forward to the output torque of motor and torque of friction works against the output torque of motor, torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 110(=100+20-10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1)
Page 1522(4) In case of minus move (down) and deceleration Because torque of Gravity works against the output torque of motor and torque of friction works forward to the output torque of motor, torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 90(=100-20+10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1) T
Page 1523Limitations - Linear type positioning When Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is enabled, linear type positioning for rapid traverse is selected automatically in AI high precision contour control and AI nano high precision contour control mode even if the parameter LRP, bit 1 of parameter No.
Page 1524Parameters 1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Valid range Increment system Unit IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 240000 ` 6 100000 ` Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 96000 ` 6 48000 ` Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 240000 ` 6 100000 ` Set
Page 15251774 Time constant t T 2 for each axis used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse of Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration [Data type] word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 512 Specify a time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid trav
Page 1526#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19501 FRP [Data type] Bit #5 FRP Acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse in AI high precision contour control and AI nano high precision contour control mode is: 0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation 1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation By setting
Page 1527#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19540 FAP [Data type] Bit #0 FAP Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. By setting both FAP, bit 0 of parameter No. 19540, and FRP, bit 5 of parameter No. 19501, to 1 and setting parameter to determine the reference acceleration (No. 1420 and No
Page 152819541 Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P1) 19542 Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P2) 19543 Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P3) 19544 Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P4) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] 0.01% [Valid data r
Page 152919552 Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P1 during movement in - direction and acceleration) 19553 Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P2 during movement in - direction and acceleration) 19554 Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P3 d
Page 153019567 Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P4 during movement in - direction and deceleration) 19568 Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P5 during movement in - direction and deceleration) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] 0.01% [Valid data range] 0 to 3
Page 1531TECHNICAL REPORT NO. TMN 01/124E Date Sep. General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i-TA/MA/TB/MB Concerning the addition of Interpolation type straightness compensation 1. Communicate this report to : ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINATI MILA
Page 1532FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A DESCRIPTIONS Concerning the addition of Interpolation type straightness compensation 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A Name DESCRIPTIONS Spec.No./Ed. B-63002EN/02 2.Summary of Change New, Add,
Page 1533Interpolation type straightness compensation General By this function, the following two functions can be used. (1) 128 straightness compensation points (2) Interpolation type straightness compensation 128 straightness compensation points The conventional straightness compensation function compensat
Page 1534FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of Interpolation type straightness compensation 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A Name CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec.No./Ed. B-63003EN-
Page 1535Interpolation type straightness compensation General By this function, the following two functions can be used. (1) 128 straightness compensation points (2) Interpolation type straightness compensation FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) TITLE Concerning
Page 1536128 straightness compensation points - Specification In straightness compensation, compensation data is set as the compensation amounts at the individual compensation points, in the same way as in stored pitch error compensation. This enables fine compensation. Up to six combinations of moving axes
Page 1537ϕ : Number of the straightness compensation point at extremely negative point of the moving axis (parameter No.13381 - 13386) π : Number of the straightness compensation point at extremely positive point of the moving axis δ : Number of the straightness compensation point for the reference point of
Page 1538- Examples for parameter setting As for the method of setting parameters for the moving axes, the compensation axes and the effective magnification, the followings can be set. (1) A single compensation axis can be set for a single moving axis. Setting of Setting of moving axis compensation axis Para
Page 1539(3) A compensation axis can be set as a moving axis. Setting of Setting of moving axis compensation axis Paramete Setting Paramete Setting Effective magnification r value r value No No Value set in parameter 5711 1 5721 2 No.13391 Value set in parameter 5712 2 5722 3 No.13392 Value set in parameter
Page 1540Interpolation type straightness compensation - Specification Compensation data, which is set using 128-point straightness compensation data, is divided into parts in each compensation point interval and output. - Compensation method With the 128-point straightness compensation method, the straightne
Page 1541Parameter 5711 Axis number of moving axis 1 5712 Axis number of moving axis 2 5713 Axis number of moving axis 3 5714 Axis number of moving axis 4 5715 Axis number of moving axis 5 5716 Axis number of moving axis 6 [Data type] Byte type [Valid data range] 1 – Number of controlled axes Set the axis nu
Page 1542Number of straightness compensation point at extremely negative 13386 point of moving axis 6 [Data type] Word type [Valid data range] 6000 – 6767 Set the number of the straightness compensation point at the extremely negative point for each moving axis. When the value set in this parameter is out of
Page 1543FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) TITLE Concerning the addition of Interpolation type straightness compensation 01 01.09.17 Newly Registered No. B-63003EN-1/02-11 EDT. DATE DESIGN DESCRIPTION PAGE 10/11
Page 1544Alarm and Message No Message Meaning 5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER The parameter for straightness (ST.COMP) compensation is not correct. This alarm occurs in the following case: • Invalid axis number is assigned to moving or compensation axis. • Parameter No.13881-13886 setting is not correct. 5321 S-COMP.
Page 1545Note (1) This function is an option function (2) Stored pitch error compensation option is necessary to use this function. (3) If the feedrate is high, multiple compensation pulses may be output at the same time depending on the straightness compensation amount. (4) The compensation point interval i
Page 1546FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS Concerning the addition of Interpolation type straightness compensation 1.Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS Spec.No./Ed. B-63522EN/01 2.Summary of Change New, Add, Applica
Page 1547Interpolation type straightness compensation General By this function, the following two functions can be used. (1) 128 straightness compensation points (2) Interpolation type straightness compensation 128 straightness compensation points The conventional straightness compensation function compensat
Page 1548FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of Interpolation type straightness compensation 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B Name CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec.No./Ed. B-63523EN-1/01 2.S
Page 1549Interpolation type straightness compensation General By this function, the following two functions can be used. (1) 128 straightness compensation points (2) Interpolation type straightness compensation FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) TITLE Concerning the
Page 1550128 straightness compensation points - Specification In straightness compensation, compensation data is set as the compensation amounts at the individual compensation points, in the same way as in stored pitch error compensation. This enables fine compensation. Up to six combinations of moving axes
Page 1551ϕ : Number of the straightness compensation point at extremely negative point of the moving axis (parameter No.13381 - 13386) π : Number of the straightness compensation point at extremely positive point of the moving axis δ : Number of the straightness compensation point for the reference point of
Page 1552- Examples for parameter setting As for the method of setting parameters for the moving axes, the compensation axes and the effective magnification, the followings can be set. (1) A single compensation axis can be set for a single moving axis. Setting of Setting of moving axis compensation axis Para
Page 1553(3) A compensation axis can be set as a moving axis. Setting of Setting of moving axis compensation axis Paramete Setting Paramete Setting Effective magnification r value r value No No Value set in parameter 5711 1 5721 2 No.13391 Value set in parameter 5712 2 5722 3 No.13392 Value set in parameter
Page 1554Interpolation type straightness compensation - Specification Compensation data, which is set using 128-point straightness compensation data, is divided into parts in each compensation point interval and output. - Compensation method With the 128-point straightness compensation method, the straightne
Page 1555Parameter 5711 Axis number of moving axis 1 5712 Axis number of moving axis 2 5713 Axis number of moving axis 3 5714 Axis number of moving axis 4 5715 Axis number of moving axis 5 5716 Axis number of moving axis 6 [Data type] Byte type [Valid data range] 1 – Number of controlled axes Set the axis nu
Page 1556Number of straightness compensation point at extremely negative 13386 point of moving axis 6 [Data type] Word type [Valid data range] 6000 – 6767 Set the number of the straightness compensation point at the extremely negative point for each moving axis. When the value set in this parameter is out of
Page 1557Alarm and Message No Message Meaning 5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER The parameter for straightness (ST.COMP) compensation is not correct. This alarm occurs in the following case: • Invalid axis number is assigned to moving or compensation axis. • Parameter No.13881-13886 setting is not correct. 5321 S-COMP.
Page 1558Note (1) This function is an option function (2) Stored pitch error compensation option is necessary to use this function. (3) If the feedrate is high, multiple compensation pulses may be output at the same time depending on the straightness compensation amount. (4) The compensation point interval i
Page 1559TECHNICAL REPORT NO. TMN01/149E Date General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i-TA/TB, FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-MA/MB Concerning the addition of PMC axis control expansion 1. Communicate this report to : Your information GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINATI MI
Page 1560FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of PMC axis control expansion 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B Name CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec.No./Ed. B-63523EN-1/01 2.Summary of Change N
Page 1561PMC axis control expansion Outline By this function, following functions can be used. (1) Cutting feed - sec/block The time for block execution can be specified. (2) Simultaneous start mode ON/OFF The commands of plural path can be started simultaneously by simultaneous start mode ON. (3) Superimpos
Page 1562Cutting feed - sec/block - Specification The execution time until block end is specified by 0.1s unit. - Axis control command signals Command block Axis control Operation command Command data EC0g EC6g Cutting feed - sec/block Total moving distance : (exponential acceleration EID0g EID31g 21H /d
Page 1563Simultaneous start mode ON/OFF - Specification The commands of plural path can be started simultaneously by setting simultaneous start mode ON. By using “1.2 Cutting feed - sec/block” together with this function, the linear interpolation can be realized. - Axis control command signals Command block
Page 1564Step 2 : Cutting feed - sec/block for A group and C group EC0A ~ EC6A = 00100001(21H) EC0C ~ EC6C = 00100001(21H) EIF0A ~ EIF7A = 00110010(32H) EIF0C ~ EIF7C = 00110010(32H) EIF8A ~ EIF15A = 00000000(00H) EIF8C ~ EIF15C = 00000000(00H) EID0A ~ EID7A = 01000000(40H) EID0C ~ EID7C = 01010000(50H) EID8
Page 1565Superimposition - Specification When an axis is moving by controlling as PMC-axis, it is possible to command to that axis from execution program. And it is possible to command to an axis at program execution from PMC side. By this, CNC axis command and PMC axis command can be superimposed. - Axis co
Page 1566- Command which waits until the end of PMC axis moving When the following block is commanded during program execution, the block is executed after waiting superimposed command end from PMC. Rapid traverse block with command of superimposed axis G05, G05.1 and G08 block Above CNC blocks are start
Page 1567Alarm & Message No. Message Contents 130 ILLEGAL AXIS An axis control command was given by PMC to OPERATION an axis controlled by CNC. Or, an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis controlled by PMC. 138 SUPERIMPOSED The total distribution amount of the CNC and DATA PMC is too large during
Page 1568FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning the addition of PMC axis control expansion 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A Name CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec.No./Ed. B-63003EN-1/02 2.Summary of
Page 1569PMC axis control expansion Outline By this function, following functions can be used. (1) Cutting feed - sec/block The time for block execution can be specified. (2) Simultaneous start mode ON/OFF The commands of plural path can be started simultaneously by simultaneous start mode ON. (3) Superimpos
Page 1570Cutting feed - sec/block - Specification The execution time until block end is specified by 0.1s unit. - Axis control command signals Command block Axis control Operation command Command data EC0g EC6g Cutting feed - sec/block Total moving distance : (exponential acceleration EID0g EID31g 21H /d
Page 1571Simultaneous start mode ON/OFF - Specification The commands of plural path can be started simultaneously by setting simultaneous start mode ON. By using “1.2 Cutting feed - sec/block” together with this function, the linear interpolation can be realized. - Axis control command signals Command block
Page 1572Step 2 : Cutting feed - sec/block for A group and C group EC0A ~ EC6A = 00100001(21H) EC0C ~ EC6C = 00100001(21H) EIF0A ~ EIF7A = 00110010(32H) EIF0C ~ EIF7C = 00110010(32H) EIF8A ~ EIF15A = 00000000(00H) EIF8C ~ EIF15C = 00000000(00H) EID0A ~ EID7A = 01000000(40H) EID0C ~ EID7C = 01010000(50H) EID8
Page 1573Superimposition - Specification When an axis is moving by controlling as PMC-axis, it is possible to command to that axis from execution program. And it is possible to command to an axis at program execution from PMC side. By this, CNC axis command and PMC axis command can be superimposed. - Axis co
Page 1574- Command which waits until the end of PMC axis moving When the following block is commanded during program execution, the block is executed after waiting superimposed command end from PMC. Rapid traverse block with command of superimposed axis G05, G05.1 and G08 block Above CNC blocks are start
Page 1575Alarm & Message No. Message Contents 130 ILLEGAL AXIS An axis control command was given by PMC to OPERATION an axis controlled by CNC. Or, an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis controlled by PMC. 138 SUPERIMPOSED The total distribution amount of the CNC and DATA PMC is too large during
Page 1576FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Explanation change of Rigid tapping 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUA
Page 15779.11.7.4 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode The explanation of “9.11.7.4 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode” is changed as follows. ( before change ) The spindle output is produced in the same way as executing S0. Cancel the PMC rigid tapping mode at the falling edge of the ENB signal (ENB2 signal
Page 1578TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 03/007E Date: 24-Jan-03 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i - TB OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is - TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i - TB OPERATO
Page 1579FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning addition of the Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/16
Page 1580• Adding “FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – TA / TB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move (A-78376E)” to this description (Attached papers) FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – TA / TB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move (A-78376E) 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/21
Page 1581FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – TA / TB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move Index 1. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 2 2. Explanation............................................................
Page 15821. Outline If you want to perform roughing or semi-finishing with a single tool, you may fine-adjust the tool compensation. Moreover, you may want to fine-adjust the setting of the workpiece origin offset that was already set up. This function can change the offset (such as tool compensation or work
Page 15832.3 Changing the tool compensation This function can change the tool compensation identified by the offset number corresponding to T code specified during automatic operation. If there is no valid tool compensation (for example, when no T code has been issued since cycle start), no tool compensation
Page 1584Example Assume the following conditions: • Specified workpiece coordinate system: G56 • G56 workpiece origin offset (X-axis): 50.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (Z-axis): 5.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (C-axis): 180.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (Y-axis): -60.000 • Amount of manual feed-b
Page 15853. Signal Active offset change mode signal CHGAO [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal selects the manual feed-based active offset change mode. [Operation] Setting this signal to "1" selects the manual feed-based active offset change mode. • Automatic operation is at pause or
Page 1586Active offset changing signal MCHAO [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the manual feed-based active offset change mode has been selected and the offset is being changed. [Output condition]The signal becomes "1" when all the following conditions are satisfied
Page 1587The following timing chart shows how the input and signals behave. A command such as Txxxx, or G54 specifies what tool compensation number Operation is put at pause Operation restarts or workpiece coordinate system is to be (stop) to change the offset. with the new offset. made valid. Automatic oper
Page 1588#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5000 ASG [ Input type ] Setting input [ Data type ] Bit ASG When the tool geometry/wear compensation function is available, the compensation value changed by this function is: 0: Geometry compensation 1: Wear compensation #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5040 MOP [ Input type ] Parame
Page 1589The change of the tool compensation value follows the relation among this parameter, the parameter LVC(No.5003#6), and the parameter TGC(No.5003#7). AOF(No.5041#0)=0 AOF(No.5041#0)=1 LVC(No.5003#6=0) Can be changed LVC(No.5003#6=1) Cannot be changed Cannot be changed TGC(No.5003#7=0) Can be changed
Page 1590[Relation parameter] #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5003 TGC LVC [ Input type ] Parameter input [ Data type ] Bit LVC Offset value of tool offset 0: Not cleared, but held by reset 1: Cleared by reset TGC Tool geometry compensation value 0: Not canceled by reset 1: Canceled by reset (Valid when LVC,#6 of pa
Page 1591TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 03/011E Date : Feb.06.’03 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i - MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 18i/180i/180is - MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is - MA
Page 1592FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Concerning addition of the Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/16
Page 1593• Adding “FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – MA / MB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move (A-78535E)” to this description (Attached papers) FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – MA / MB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move (A-78535E) 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/21
Page 1594FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – MA/MB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move Index 1. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 2 2. Explanation..............................................................
Page 15951. Outline If you want to perform roughing or semi-finishing with a single tool, you may fine-adjust the tool length compensation or cutter compensation. Moreover, you may want to fine-adjust the setting of the workpiece origin offset that was already set up. This function can change the offset (suc
Page 1596Example The compensation value set at Z-axis of the offset number 10 becomes 54.700 + (-2.583) = 52.117 mm under the following conditions: • Specified H code: H10 • Value set at Z-axis of the offset number 10: 54.700 mm • Amount of movement caused by manual feed along the Z-axis: -2.583 mm 2.4 Chang
Page 1597Example Assume the following conditions: • Specified workpiece coordinate system: G56 • G56 workpiece origin offset (X-axis): 50.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (Y-axis): -60.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (Z-axis): 5.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (C-axis): 180.000 • Amount of manual feed-b
Page 15982.7 Presetting the relative position indicator Setting parameter APL (No. 3115#5) to 1 can preset the relative position indicator (counter) to 0 automatically when active offset change mode is selected. In this case, performing manual feed until the relative position indicator (counter) becomes 0 ca
Page 15993. Signal Active offset change mode signal CHGAO [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal selects the manual feed-based active offset change mode. [Operation] Setting this signal to "1" selects the manual feed-based active offset change mode. • Automatic operation is at pause or
Page 1600Signal addresses • Parameter No.5040#2(MOP)=0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0297 AOFS2 AOFS1 CHGAO #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0297 MCHAO • Parameter No.5040#2(MOP)=1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0203 AOFS2 AOFS1 CHGAO #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0199 MCHAO The following timing chart shows how the input and signal
Page 16014. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 APL [ Input type ] Parameter input [ Data type ] Bit axis APL Specifies whether to preset the relative position indicator automatically when the manual feed-based active offset change mode is selected, as follows: 0: Do not preset. 1: Preset. This signal is
Page 1602#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5041 AOF [ Input type ] Parameter input [ Data type ] Bit AOF When the manual feed-based active offset change mode is selected in a reset state or a cleared state, the tool compensation: 0: Can be changed 1: Cannot be changed However, even if “1” is set in parameter CLR(No.34
Page 1603#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3409 CFH [ Input type ] Parameter input [ Data type ] Bit CFH When bit 6(CLR) of parameter No.3402 is 1, the reset button on the MDI panel, the external reset signal, the reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop will, 0: Clear F codes, H codes, D codes. 1: Not clear F codes
Page 1604TECHNICAL REPORT NO. TMN03/016E Date : Feb.25.’03 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) Description change of Manual feedrate overr
Page 1605FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Description change of Manual feedrate override signal / Feedrate override signal 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21
Page 1606The description of “3.1 Manual feedrate override signal (*JV0 - *JV15) is changed as follows. [Function] The override value can be specified in the range of 0% to 655.34% in units of 0.01%. Same examples are listed below. *JV0 - *JV15 Override value 12 8 4 0 (%) 1111 1111 1111 1111 0 1111 1111 1111
Page 1607The value is calculated as follows. 1. In case that the override is 2%, (1) Multiply override value by 100 to convert 0.01% unit. 200 (2) Convert to binary data. 0000 0000 1100 1000 (3) Do logical NOT of binary data. 1111 1111 0011 0111 2. In case that the input signal is “1110 1110 1110 1110”, (1)
Page 1608The following description is added to “7.1.7.2 Feedrate override signal (*FV0 - *FV7)”. [Function] Same examples are listed below. *FV0 - *FV7 Override value 4 0 (%) 1111 1111 0 1111 1110 1 1111 1101 2 1111 1100 3 1111 1011 4 1111 1010 5 1111 0101 10 1111 0000 15 1110 1011 20 1110 0110 25 1110 0001
Page 1609TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 03/099E Date : Dec.03.’03 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) Setting of parameters for rotary scale with
Page 1610FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i –MA/MB FANUC Series 18i –MB5 Setting of parameters for rotary scale without rotary data FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i –MA/MB, 18i -MB5 Title Setting of parameters for rotary scale without rotary data Draw No. A-78823E 03 Dec.02.2003 Out of #3 is added. 02 Feb.25.2003 M.tanaka
Page 1611General This manual described the method of parameter setting when the rotary scale which has no rotary data (the number of rotation) is used, such as Heidenhain rotary scale RCN723 or Futaba rotary scale FRR902L3DB. We have improved our software, and removed the problems when a rotary scale without
Page 1612Details 1. Difference in rotary axial type and movable range rotary axial type movable range required parameters reference rotary axis B type under one rotation No.1817#3 No.1867 or 1868 chapter 1.1 rotary axis B type over one rotation No.1815#0 chapter 1.2 rotary axis A type － No.1815#6 chapter 1.3
Page 16131.1. In the case of a rotary axis B type whose movable range is under one rotation In the case of a rotary axis whose movable range is under one rotation, it is possible to know its position under one rotation, even if a rotary scale without rotary data (the number of rotation) is used. The scale da
Page 1614An uncontinuous point of scale data Before using this function it is necessary to know the position of the uncontinuous point in following process. 1. Perform a reference position return with No.1817#3=0. 2. Record machine coordinate value after moving to one side of movable range. 3. Turn the CNC o
Page 1615#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1817 SCRx [Data type] Bit axis SCRx Specifies whether to convert scale data so that rotary axis B type is available for the axis using a rotary scale without rotary data 0: not to convert 1: to convert NOTE ・ It is necessary to turn the CNC off after setting this parameter. ・
Page 1616As for the axis with this parameter = 0, the parameter (No.1861) for all axes is available. NOTE ・ It is necessary to turn the CNC off after setting this parameter. ・ In FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i –A, there is not this parameter. Use the parameter (No.1867) for all axes. ・ This parameter is availabl
Page 16171.2. In the case of a rotary axis B type whose movable range is over one rotation As for an axis whose movable range is over one rotation and its rotary scale which has no rotary data , for example, 30.000 degree and 390.000 degree have completely same scale data though their position is different f
Page 16181.3. In the case of a rotary axis A type In the case of a rotary axis A type, when machine position passes 0 degree or the shift value per one rotation (360 degree or the parameter No.1260), the data for the reference position (the parameter No.1860, 1861) is renewed so that following up at power up
Page 16192. Method of using Heidenhain rotary scale RCN223, 723 and 220 RCN223, 723 and 220 are the detectors which save absolute position only within one rotation. And the former two detectors (RCN223 and 723) are the detectors which have eight million pulses every one rotation. There are following cautions
Page 1620NOTE Rotary data of RCN223, 723 and 220 can be saved during separate detector I/F unit turned on. But it is forgotten as soon as it turned off. It is necessary to set parameters in order to clear rotary data because it is undefined according to the place where separate detector I/F unit is turned of
Page 1621【Reference counter capacity】 No.1821 Set amount of feed back pulsees (detection unit) per a table rotation. NOTE) Set amount of (pulses per a table rotation / 8) as reference counter capacity in the case of No.2275#0=0. But in this case eight grids are made every a table rotation. (Example of parame
Page 1622FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is/20i - MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) About the “1% step rapid traverse override” description change 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i
Page 1623The description of “7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal” is changed as follows. General • 1% step rapid traverse override 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV determines whether rapid traverse override specified with rapid traverse overri
Page 1624The description of “1% step rapid traverse override selection signal” is changed as follows. 1% step rapid traverse overrde selection signal HROV [Classification] Input signal [Function] Select the rapid traverse override signals or the 1% step rapid traverse override signals. [Operation] W
Page 1625TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No.TMN 05/ Date : . , 2005 General Manager of Software Development Laboratory FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is/20i - MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) About the “FSSB Setting” description addi
Page 1626FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is/20i - MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) About the “FSSB Setting” description addition 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A F
Page 1627The description of “1.4.3 FSSB Setting Manual setting 1” is changed as follows. General By manual setting 1, the value set for parameter No.1023 when the power is switched on is regarded as a slave number. Specifically, an axis for which parameter No.1023 is set to 1 is connected to the amplifier ne